Pioneer Stereo Receiver VSX LX52 User Manual

Operating Instructions  
audio/video multi-channel receiver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries  
Symbol for  
equipment  
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean  
that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with  
general household waste.  
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries,  
please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national  
legislation.  
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable  
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the  
environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.  
Symbol examples  
for batteries  
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries,  
please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of  
sale where you purchased the items.  
These symbols are only valid in the European Union.  
For countries outside the European Union:  
If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and  
ask for the correct method of disposal.  
Pb  
K058a_A1_En  
VENTILATION CAUTION  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat  
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and  
30 cm at each side).  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which  
requires repair will be charged for even during the  
WARNING  
warranty period.  
K041_En  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the  
product, and to protect it from overheating. To  
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be  
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,  
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the  
CAUTION  
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not  
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.  
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect  
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from  
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,  
make sure the unit has been installed so that the  
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC  
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,  
the power cord should also be unplugged from the  
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time  
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En  
(for example, when on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
Operating Environment  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH  
(cooling vents not blocked)  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in  
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or  
strong artificial light)  
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate  
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.  
Contents  
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to  
Flow of settings on the receiver . . . . . 6  
the front panel input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Connecting a USB device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
01 Before you start  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
04 Basic Setup  
Switching the speaker impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Changing the OSD display language  
02 Controls and displays  
(OSD Language). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 40  
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 41  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
03 Connecting your equipment  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Determining the speakers’ application . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Other speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Some tips for improving sound quality . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections . . . 19  
Bi-amping your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Selecting the Surr Back system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
ZONE 2 setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Bi-Amping setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
About the audio connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
About the video converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Connecting your TV and playback components . . . . . 23  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output . . 24  
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input . . . . . . . . . 25  
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR  
05 Basic playback  
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Playing a source with HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . 42  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 43  
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod. . . . . . . . 43  
Playing a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Playing back audio files stored on a USB  
memory device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Playing back photo files stored on a USB  
memory device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
About playable file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Tuning directly to a station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
An introduction to RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
and other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver  
06 Listening to your system  
Auto playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Listening in surround sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Using Stream Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 53  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Setting the Up Mix function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Better sound using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
or other set-top box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 28  
Connecting other audio components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Connecting AM/FM antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
MULTI-ZONE setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Switching components on and off  
using the 12 volt trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 34  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07 KURO LINK  
11 The system and the other setup  
Making the KURO LINK connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Cautions on the KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
About connections with a product of a different  
brand that supports the KURO LINK function . . . . . 58  
KURO LINK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Making receiver settings from the System Setup  
menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
THX Audio Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Power ON Level Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Volume Limit Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
08 Using other functions  
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Setting the Video options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Using the sleep timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Switching the HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Default system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
12 Additional information  
Speaker Setting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Positional relationship between speakers and  
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . . 96  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Important information regarding  
09 Controlling the rest of your system  
Operating multiple receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Setting the remote to control other components . . . . 67  
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Resetting the remote control presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Controls the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
the HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . 101  
About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct  
with different input signal formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
10 The Advanced MCACC menu  
Making receiver settings from the Advanced  
MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Fine Speaker Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Acoustic Cal EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Output PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Clearing MCACC presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flow of settings on the receiver  
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily  
after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.  
The colors of the steps indicate the following:  
Required setting item  
Setting to be made as necessary  
MCACC speaker settings  
• Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) (page 39)  
1
2
Before you start  
• Checking what’s in the box (page 8)  
• Loading the batteries (page 8)  
9
10 The Input Setup menu (page 40)  
Determining the speakers’ application (page 16)  
• 7.1ch surround connection  
• 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection  
• 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection  
• 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection  
(When using connections other than the  
recommended connections)  
Connecting the speakers  
• Placing the speakers (page 17)  
• Connecting the speakers (page 18)  
• Standard5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surroundconnections  
(page 19)  
11 Switching the HDMI output (page 65)  
3
4
12 Basic playback (page 42)  
13 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired  
• Using the various listening modes  
• Using surround back channel processing (page 53)  
• Better sound using Phase Control (page 55)  
• Measure the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/  
FRONT ALIGN) (page 72)  
• Change the channel level while listening (Tip on  
page 86)  
• Switches on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Sound  
retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page 60)  
• Bi-amping your speakers (page 20)  
Connecting the components  
• About the audio connection (page 21)  
• About the video converter (page 22)  
• Connecting your TV and playback components  
(page 23)  
• Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 30)  
• Plugging in the receiver (page 37)  
• Setting the PQLS function (page 59)  
• Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness or  
Sound delay, etc.) (page 60)  
• Setting the Video options (page 61)  
5
Switching the speaker impedance (page 38)  
(Only if the impedance of the connected speakers is  
6 Ω to 8 Ω)  
14 Other optional adjustments and settings  
• KURO LINK Setup (page 58)  
• The Advanced MCACC menu (page 71)  
• The system and the other setup (page 84)  
6
7
Power On  
Changing the OSD display language (OSD  
Language) (page 38)  
15 Making maximum use of the remote control  
• Operating multiple receivers (page 67)  
• Setting the remote to control other components  
(page 67)  
8
Surround back speaker setting (page 85)  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Chapter 1:  
Before you start  
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,  
which are designed for the next-generation high-  
definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,  
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.  
Features  
Advanced Direct Energy design  
This receiver offers a new advancement in discrete  
design unique to Pioneer for high-power drivability, low  
distortion and stable imaging. Through a circuit design  
that minimizes the energy loss of the amplifier for each of  
the channels, this receiver generates equal amplifier  
power to all channels, eliminating the possibility of one  
channel dominating a particular sound field.  
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology  
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer  
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is  
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver  
as primary audio).  
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners  
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.  
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC  
Phase Control  
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate  
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced  
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This  
innovative technology measures the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to  
customize your system calibration with the help of a  
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen or  
using computer. With the additional benefits of  
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave  
control and microphone measurements from a series of  
reference points, your home theater experience can be  
truly customized for optimal surround sound.  
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this  
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction  
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound  
image at your listening position.  
Sound Retriever  
The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to  
restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left  
over after compression. This helps bring CD quality  
sound back to WMA, MP3 and MPEG-4 AAC audio files  
and achieves a richer sense of presence when playing  
Dolby Digital, DTS or WMA 9 Pro audio formats recorded  
in multiple channels on DVDs and other discs.  
THX Select2 Plus certified design  
This receiver bears the THX Select2 Plus logo, which  
means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and  
performance tests covering every aspect of the product.  
This includes testing of pre-amplifier and power amplifier  
performance and operation, and hundreds of other  
parameters in both the digital and analog domain,  
making your home theater experience as faithful as  
possible to what the director intended.  
Front Stage Surround Advance  
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can  
enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using  
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality  
of the original sound.  
Auto Level Control  
When the source is played in Auto level control mode  
(ALC), this receiver automatically equalizes the playback  
sound level according to the variation in recording levels.  
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby  
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby  
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD  
Master Audio  
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound  
right into your home with up to six channels of surround  
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)  
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.  
HDMI and digital video conversion  
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video  
format, providing you with high-definition digital video/  
audio via a single cable.  
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby  
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also  
compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate  
this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer  
component that supports the KURO LINK function by  
connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.  
Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver  
makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and  
analog video signals being input are converted and  
output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.  
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders  
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby  
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing  
surround sound for any stereo source.  
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you  
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and  
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
iPod and USB Ready  
This receiver has the terminals for connecting an iPod  
unit and a USB mass storage device.  
Loading the batteries  
The iPod terminal is ready for handling digital audio, and  
this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes on-screen  
control of your iPod an added possibility.  
The USB terminal allows you to listen to two-channel  
audio from a USB mass storage device connected to this  
receiver.  
CAUTION  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as  
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:  
Checking what’s in the box  
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied  
• Never use new and old batteries together.  
accessories:  
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries  
properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)  
• Remote control unit  
• Batteries with the same shape may have different  
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
• AA size IEC R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm system  
operation) x2  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
• AM loop antenna  
• FM wire antenna  
• iPod cable  
WARNING  
• Power cord  
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
• Warranty card  
• These operating instructions  
Installing the receiver  
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a  
level and stable surface.  
Operating range of remote control unit  
The remote control may not work properly if:  
Don’t install it on the following places:  
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)  
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off  
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.  
– in direct sunlight  
– in damp or wet areas  
– in extremely hot or cold areas  
– in places where there is vibration or other movement  
– in places that are very dusty  
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and  
the receiver’s remote sensor.  
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting  
infrared rays.  
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another  
infrared remote control unit.  
• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the  
power is turned on. The bottom panel gets hot when  
the power is on, and touching it could cause burns.  
30°  
30°  
7 m  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
Chapter 2:  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
1
RECEIVER  
12  
13  
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
2
Input function buttons  
1
2
Press to select control of other components (see  
Controlling the rest of your system on page 67).  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function (page 42).  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
3
Number buttons and other receiver/component  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
controls  
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio  
frequency (page 48) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.  
4
5
6
3
4
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
Press  
first to access:  
RECEIVER  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal  
(page 65).  
ENTER  
0
INPUT  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 55).  
TV CONTROL  
14  
15  
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets  
(page 54).  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and  
select the amount of time before sleep (page 65).  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
5
6
SBch – Use to select the surround back/virtual surround  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
back channel mode (page 53)  
.
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
RETURN  
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog  
input signal to prevent distortion (page 64).  
PTY  
SEARCH  
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 65).  
HOME  
MENU  
iPod CTRL  
TUNE  
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,  
then use / to adjust the level (page 86).  
Press TUNER first to access:  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio  
7
8
station directly using the number buttons (page 48).  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
CLASS – Switches between the seven banks (classes)  
of radio station presets (page 48).  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
16  
17  
4
TV CONTROL buttons  
9
10  
11  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to  
TV operation selector switch. Thus if you only have one TV  
to hook up to this system assign it to the TV operation  
selector switch (see page 68 for more on this).  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
– Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.  
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.  
CH +/– – Use to select channels.  
RECEIVER  
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according  
to component control using the following system:  
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.  
White – Receiver control, TV Control  
Blue – Other controls  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
5
Tuner/component control buttons/HOME MENU  
8
9
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD or  
BD discs.  
DISP – Switches between named station presets and  
radio frequencies.  
These button controls can be accessed after you have  
selected the corresponding input function button (DVD,  
DVR, TV, etc.). The BAND, T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH  
tuner controls are explained on page 48.  
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.  
Press  
first to access:  
RECEIVER  
REMOTE SETUP  
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio  
options (page 60).  
Use to input the preset code when making remote  
control settings and to set the remote control mode  
(page 67).  
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video  
options (page 61).  
10 TV CTRL  
HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu  
(pages 38, 40, 58, 71, 84 and 88).  
Use this button to set preset code of your TV’s  
manufacturer when controlling TV (see Selecting preset  
codes directly on page 67 for more on this).  
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current  
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu  
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).  
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch  
Switch to perform operations in the main zone, ZONE 2  
and ZONE 3 (page 64).  
6
/// (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 71) and the Audio or Video  
options (page 60 or 61). Also used to control DVD menus/  
options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player.  
Use TUNE/ to find radio frequencies and use PRESET  
/ to find preset stations (page 48).  
12 Remote control LED  
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control  
(page 67).  
13 SOURCE  
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the  
receiver (see page 67 for more on this).  
7
Component/Receiver control buttons  
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a  
component after you have selected it using the input  
function buttons.  
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
15 MUTE  
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after  
you have selected the corresponding input function  
button (for example DVD, DVR or TV). These buttons also  
function as described below.  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
RECEIVER  
16  
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to  
select the white commands above the number buttons  
(A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up surround  
sound.  
Press TUNER first to access:  
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception  
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then switching  
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 48)  
.
17  
Press first to access:  
RECEIVER  
Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the  
buttons.  
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT Switches between Auto  
Surround (page 50), Auto level control mode and  
Stream Direct mode (page 53).  
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and  
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 52).  
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to  
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and  
Neo:6 options (page 50).  
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various  
surround modes (page 51).  
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode  
(page 51).  
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control  
(page 55).  
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings  
(page 65).  
PQLS – Press to select PQLS setting (page 59).  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Front panel  
02  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VSX-LX52  
STANDBY/ON  
ENTER  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
BAND  
TUNE  
TUNE  
PQLS  
HDMI  
PRESET  
PRESET  
TUNER EDIT  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
AUTO SURR/ALC/  
STREAM DIRECT  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
MULTI-ZONE  
STEREO  
HOME THX  
SPEAKERS  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
PHONES  
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
9
10  
11 12 13  
14  
15  
1
INPUT SELECTOR dial  
9
PHONES jack  
Use to select an input function.  
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are  
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.  
2
STANDBY/ON  
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power  
10 Listening mode buttons  
indicator lights when the receiver is on.  
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT Switches  
When the KURO LINK function is set to ON, the power  
between Auto Surround (page 50), Auto level control  
indicator lights dimly when the power is in standby.  
mode and Stream Direct mode (page 53)  
.
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and  
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 52).  
3
Tuner controls  
BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio bands  
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between  
the various surround modes (page 51).  
(page 48).  
TUNE +/– – Use to find radio frequencies (page 48).  
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard  
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro  
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 50).  
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening  
mode (page 51).  
PRESET +/– – Use to find preset stations (page 48).  
TUNER EDIT Use with TUNE +/–  
ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall  
(page 48)  
,
PRESET +/– and  
.
4
PHASE CONTROL indicator  
Phase Control is selected (page 55)  
ADVANCED MCACC indicator Lights when EQ is  
Lights to indicate  
11 SPEAKERS  
Use to change the speaker system (page 63).  
.
12 MULTI-ZONE controls  
set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu (page 60)  
.
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-  
ZONE setup on page 31) use these controls to control the  
sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE  
controls on page 63).  
PQLS indicator – Lights when the PQLS feature is  
active (page 59).  
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-  
equipped component; lights when the component is  
13 MCACC SETUP MIC jack  
Use to connect the supplied microphone (page 39).  
connected (page 23)  
.
5
Character display  
See Display on page 12.  
14 iPod/iPhone/USB terminals  
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio and video  
source, or connect a USB device for audio and photo  
playback (page 36).  
6
ENTER  
7
Remote sensor  
Receives the signals from the remote control (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 8).  
15 HDMI input connector  
Use for connection to compatible HDMI device (Video  
camera, etc.). See Connecting an HDMI-equipped  
component to the front panel input on page 35.  
8
MASTER VOLUME dial  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
Display  
1
2
3
45  
6
7
8
9
10 11  
12  
13  
14  
15 16  
2
DIGITAL PLUS  
DSD PCM  
TrueHD WMA9Pro MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO  
TUNED RDS  
AUTO  
PCM  
HDMI  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
L
C
R
2
DTS HD ES 96/24  
SL  
SR  
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER  
MONO  
dB  
XL XC XR  
TV  
DVD  
BD DVR  
CD TUNER  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
HDMI [ 2 ]  
USB  
[ 3 ]  
MSTR  
LFE  
iPod  
[ 4 ]  
AUTO SURROUND  
STREAM DIRECT  
2
PROLOGIC  
THX ADV.SURROUND  
x
Neo:6  
STEREO STANDARD  
SP AB  
SLEEP  
9
17  
18 19 20  
21  
22  
1
SIGNAL indicators  
9
Listening mode indicators  
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.  
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input  
signal automatically (page 55).  
AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround  
feature is switched on (page 50).  
ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode  
is selected (page 53).  
2
Program format indicators  
Light to indicate the channels being input when PCM  
signals are being input. They do not indicate the audio  
signals being output from the receiver.  
STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is  
selected (page 53).  
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the  
Advanced Surround modes has been selected  
(page 51).  
L/R – Left front/Right front channel  
C – Center channel  
SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel  
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light  
when an LFE signal is being input)  
XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above  
XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono  
surround channel or matrix encode flag  
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched  
on (page 52).  
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard  
Surround modes is switched on (page 50).  
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is  
3
Digital format indicators  
selected (page 51).  
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format  
is detected.  
10  
(PHASE CONTROL)  
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 55).  
4
S.RTRV  
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is active  
(page 60)  
11 Analog signal indicators  
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal  
(page 64).  
.
5
MULTI-ZONE  
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 63).  
12 Tuner indicators  
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.  
STEREO Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being  
6
DSD PCM Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to  
PCM conversion with SACDs.  
received in auto stereo mode.  
PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.  
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using  
MPX.  
7
SOUND  
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone  
RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received.  
controls feature is selected (page 60).  
Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.  
13  
Lights when the sound is muted (page 10).  
8
UP MIX  
Lights when the Up Mix is switched on (page 54).  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
14 Master volume level  
Shows the overall volume level.  
---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates  
the maximum level.  
15 Input function indicators  
Light to indicate the input function you have selected.  
16 Scroll indicators  
Light when there are more selectable items when making  
the various settings.  
17 Speaker indicators  
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B  
(page 63).  
18 SLEEP  
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 65).  
19 Matrix decoding format indicators  
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro  
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 50).  
Neo:6 When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver  
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 50)  
.
20 MSTR  
Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master Audio signal.  
21 Character display  
Displays various system information.  
22 Remote control mode indicator  
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode  
setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (page 67)  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
CChaoptnern3:ecting your equipment  
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the  
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.  
Rear panel  
ASSIGN-  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT 2  
AL  
OPTICAL  
HDMI  
ABLE  
)
AC IN  
LINK  
IN  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
17  
IN  
2
IN  
3
1
2
3
OUT  
11  
NTENNA  
1
3
ONENT  
EO  
4
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
NABLE  
IN  
1
CENTER SURROUND  
CENTER  
IN  
2
AUDIO  
FM UNMAL  
75 
ޓޓ
 
(
)
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
L
5
7
8
9
10  
(
)
Single  
Y
Y
R
R
AM LOOP  
PB  
PB  
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND  
BACK  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
P
R
P
R
R  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE OUT  
6
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
SPEAKERS  
16  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK /  
B
(
)
Single  
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
P
B
S-VIDEO  
PR  
TRIGGER  
15  
13  
14  
(TPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
CONTROL  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
12  
1
2
3
Optical digital audio output/input(s) (x4)  
CAUTION  
Use the OUT jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc  
recorder.  
See Connecting other audio components on page 28.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.  
Use the IN jacks for digital audio sources, including DVD  
players/recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players,  
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the  
top of the receiver.  
etc.  
See also The Input Setup menu on page 40 to assign  
the inputs.  
4
Component video connectors (x3)  
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has  
component video output, such as a DVD player.  
See Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output  
on page 24.  
1
HDMI connectors (x6)  
Use the output to connect monitor or TV.  
Multiple inputs and two outputs for high-quality audio/  
video connection to compatible HDMI devices.  
See Connecting your TV and playback components on  
page 23.  
See Connecting your TV with no HDMI input on  
page 25.  
5
MULTI-ZONE audio/video outputs  
See Switching the HDMI output on page 65.  
Use to connect a second or third amplifier and monitors  
or TVs in a separate room.  
See MULTI-ZONE setup on page 31.  
2
Coaxial digital audio inputs (x2)  
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/  
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.  
See also The Input Setup menu on page 40 to assign  
the inputs.  
6
Composite and S-Video monitor outputs  
Use to connect monitors and TVs.  
See Connecting your TV with no HDMI input on  
page 25.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
7
Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x5)  
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD  
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks  
for composite video, S-Video and stereo analog audio.  
See Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other  
video sources on page 27.  
8
Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)  
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,  
tape decks, turntables, etc.  
See Connecting other audio components on page 28.  
9
Multichannel analog audio inputs  
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with  
multichannel analog outputs.  
See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on  
page 28.  
10 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs  
Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,  
surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.  
See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 29 (see  
also Installing your speaker system on page 19 for  
powered subwoofer connection).  
11 AM and FM antenna terminals  
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio  
broadcasts.  
See Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 30.  
12 RS-232C connector  
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when  
using Advanced MCACC.  
See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on  
page 34.  
13 Control input/output  
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you  
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote  
sensor.  
See Operating other Pioneer components with this  
unit’s sensor on page 33.  
14 Remote inputs/output  
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor  
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.  
See Connecting an IR receiver on page 33.  
15 12 V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)  
Use to switch components in your system on and off  
according to the input function of the receiver.  
See Switching components on and off using the 12  
volt trigger on page 34.  
16 Speaker terminals  
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround  
and surround back speakers.  
See Connecting the speakers on page 18.  
17 AC power inlet  
Connect the supplied power cord here.  
See Plugging in the receiver on page 37.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
[3] 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection  
(Multi Zone)  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The  
selection of input devices is limited.)  
Determining the speakers’ application  
Surround sound with a strong sense of presence can be  
enjoyed by connecting 7 speakers and 1 subwoofer. It is  
also possible to achieve high sound quality using bi-amp  
connections and to enjoy music in other rooms using the  
MULTI-ZONE feature. High sound quality can be  
achieved with a minimum of two speakers.  
Surr Back System setting: ZONE 2  
• Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right  
L
Front  
left  
SW  
R
Front  
right  
R
channels ( L and  
).  
L
Left  
R
Right  
C
• The Surr Back System setting must be made if you  
use any of the connections shown below other than  
[1] (see Selecting the Surr Back system on page 21).  
Center  
Subwoofer  
ZONE 2  
Surround  
Surround  
left  
[1] 7.1ch surround connection  
(Simple connection & Best surround)  
*Default setting  
right  
SR  
SL  
These connections prioritize surround sound with a  
speaker layout like that in a movie theater.  
[4] 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback of the same sound on the B speakers.  
Surr Back System setting: Normal (default)  
• If you have six speakers, either only connect one  
surround back speaker (6.1 ch surround), or connect  
for the 7.1-channel setting as shown on the diagram  
below but without the center speaker.  
Surr Back System setting: Speaker B  
Speaker B  
L
Front  
left  
SW  
R
Front  
right  
C
L
Front  
left  
SW  
R
Front  
right  
Center  
C
Subwoofer  
Center  
Subwoofer  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
SR  
SL  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
SR  
SL  
SBL  
Surround  
back left  
SBR  
Surround  
back right  
Other speaker connection  
• Your favorite speaker connections can be selected  
even if you have fewer than 5.1 speakers.  
[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection  
(High quality surround)  
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high  
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.  
• When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers  
with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the  
front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency  
component is played from the front speakers, so the  
speakers could be damaged.)  
Surr Back System setting: Front Bi-Amp  
After connecting, be sure to conduct the Auto  
MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure.  
See Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) on page 39.  
L
Front  
left*  
SW  
R
Front  
right*  
C
Center  
Subwoofer  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
SR  
SL  
*Bi-amp compatible speaker  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Placing the speakers  
03  
THX speaker system setup  
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the  
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the  
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating  
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the  
listener.  
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your  
speakers as shown below.  
5.1 channel surround system:  
Center  
Front right  
Front left  
L
C
R
Subwoofer  
120°  
120°  
SL  
SR  
Surround  
SBR  
Surround  
Surround  
left  
right  
Surround  
6.1 channel surround system:  
SBL  
Center  
Front left  
Front right  
Surround back  
Subwoofer  
• If you have two surround back speakers THX  
recommends placing them together and the same  
distance from your listening position for the following  
THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2  
MUSIC and THX Select2 GAMES.  
120°  
120°  
Surround  
Surround  
right  
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the  
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer  
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your  
subwoofer.  
left  
Surround Back  
See also THX Audio Setting on page 87 to make the  
settings that will give you the best sound experience  
when using the Home THX modes (page 51).  
7.1 channel surround system:  
Center  
Front left  
Front right  
Subwoofer  
90°  
90°  
Surround  
Surround  
right  
left  
60°  
Surround back  
Surround back  
right  
left  
• If you have two surround back speakers THX  
recommends placing them together and the same  
distance from your listening position (see below).  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Some tips for improving sound quality  
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect  
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines  
should help you to get the best sound from your system.  
Connecting the speakers  
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a  
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to  
match these up with the terminals on the speakers  
themselves.  
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the  
other speakers should be at about ear-level when  
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the  
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very  
high on a wall is not recommended.  
CAUTION  
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE  
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,  
disconnect the power cord before touching any  
uninsulated parts.  
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2  
m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.  
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front  
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a  
narrower angle.  
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted  
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.  
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel  
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.  
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so  
that the sound of the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker  
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of  
the front left and right speakers.  
Bare wire connections  
1
2
3
Twist exposed wire strands together. (fig. A)  
Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire. (fig. B)  
Tighten terminal. (fig. C)  
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening  
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.  
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.  
• Surround and surround back speakers should be  
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and  
tilted slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t  
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should  
be more directly behind the listener than for home  
theater playback.  
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
10 mm  
• If the surround speakers cannot be set directly to the  
side of the listening position with a 7.1-channel  
system, the surround effect can be enhanced by  
turning off the Up Mix function (see Setting the Up  
Mix function on page 54).  
Important  
• Please refer to the manual that came with your  
speakers for details on how to connect the other end  
of the speaker cables to your speakers.  
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away  
from the listening position than the front and center  
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound  
effect.  
• Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not  
possible to connect using speaker cables.  
CAUTION  
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.  
This not only improves sound quality, but also  
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from  
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of  
external shocks such as earthquakes.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Installing your speaker system  
03  
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always  
be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the  
left surround back terminal).  
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections  
Center  
Subwoofer  
Front left  
Front right  
LINE LEVEL  
INPUT  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT 2  
COAXIAL  
IN  
OPTICAL  
HDMI  
)
AC IN  
LINK  
1
IN  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT  
1
3
ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
CD-R/TAPE  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
CER  
IN  
2
AUDIO  
FM UNMAL  
75 
ޓޓ
 
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
L
(
)
Single  
Y
Y
R
R
AM LOOP  
PB  
PB  
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND  
BACK  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK /  
B
(
)
Single  
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
PB  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
1
2
The surround back terminals can also be  
used for the Speaker B and ZONE 2.  
7.1 ch surround setting  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
6.1 ch surround setting  
Surround back  
No connect  
Speaker B setting  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Speaker B - Right  
Speaker B - Left  
ZONE 2 setting  
ZONE 2 - Left  
ZONE 2 - Right  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Bi-amping your speakers  
Bi-amp compatible  
Bi-amp compatible  
speaker  
speaker  
Center  
Subwoofer  
High  
Low  
High  
Low  
Front left  
Front right  
ASSIGN-  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT 2  
COAXIAL  
IN  
OPTICAL  
HDMI  
ABLE  
)
AC IN  
LINK  
1
IN  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT  
1
3
ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
CD-R/TAPE  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
CER  
IN  
2
AUDIO  
FM UNMAL  
75 
ޓޓ
 
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
L
(
)
Single  
Y
Y
R
R
AM LOOP  
PB  
PB  
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND  
BACK  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
SURROUND BACK /  
B
(
)
Single  
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
PB  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
1
2
Surround left  
Surround right  
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver  
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different  
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your  
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate  
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement  
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.  
Bi-wiring your speakers  
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-  
amping.  
• With these connections, the Surr Back System  
setting makes no difference.  
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to  
the speaker terminal on the receiver.  
CAUTION  
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals  
have two metal plates that connect the High to the  
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are  
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely  
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for  
more information.  
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,  
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing  
so may damage your speakers.  
CAUTION  
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same  
terminal in this way.  
• When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-  
amping shown at the left.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Selecting the Surr Back system  
03  
About the audio connection  
The surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping,  
Speaker B and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the  
surround back speakers. Make this setting according to  
the application.  
There are several types of audio input and output  
terminals on this receiver. The receiver selects the first  
available signal in the following order:  
Types of cables and  
terminals  
Transferable audio  
signals  
ZONE 2 setup  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback on another component in ZONE 2.  
HDMI  
HD audio  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back  
speaker terminals.  
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections  
on page 19.  
Digital (Coaxial)  
Conventional digital audio  
Conventional analog audio  
2
Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Surr Back System menu.  
Digital (Optical)  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 85 to do this.  
Speaker B setup  
You can listen to stereo playback in another room.  
RCA (Analog)  
(White/Red)  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back  
speaker terminals.  
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections  
on page 19.  
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surr Back System  
menu.  
• With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be  
transferred in high quality over a single cable.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 85 to do this.  
Bi-Amping setup  
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high  
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.  
CAUTION  
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when  
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter  
protecting the optical socket.  
1
Connect a Bi-amp compatible speakers to the front  
and surround back speaker terminals.  
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable  
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.  
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 20.  
2
Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Surr Back System  
menu.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 85 to do this.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
About the video converter  
03  
The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only  
exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s  
1
HDMI video outputs when connecting this video source.  
If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 40), the  
converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-Video, then composite (in that order).  
VSX-LX52  
TANDBY/ON  
ENTER  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
BAND  
TUNE  
TUNE  
PQLS  
HDMI  
PRESET  
PRESET  
TUNER EDIT  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
AUTO SURR/ALC/  
STREAM DIRECT  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
MULTI-ZONE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
STEREO  
HOME THX  
SPEAKERS  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
PHONES  
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
This receiver  
Source device  
TV monitor  
Terminal for  
Terminal for  
connection with  
source device  
connection with TV  
Types of cables  
monitor  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
PR  
PR  
PB  
Y
PB  
Y
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
S-VIDEO IN  
VIDEO IN  
S-VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
Video signals can be output  
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends  
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the  
Video options on page 61) OFF.  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of certain  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned  
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended  
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Note  
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that  
some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion  
(in Setting the Video options on page 61) OFF.  
• The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and  
1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.  
• Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite monitor output.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your TV and playback components  
Connecting using HDMI  
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.), you can connect it to this  
receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.  
If the TV and playback components support the Pioneer KURO LINK feature, the convenient KURO LINK functions can  
be used (see KURO LINK on page 57).  
HDMI/DVI-compatible  
Blu-ray disc player  
Other HDMI/DVI-  
equipped component  
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor  
or flat screen TV  
Select one  
DIGITAL OUT  
HDMI OUT  
HDMI OUT  
HDMI IN  
AUDIO OUT  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
This connection is  
required in order to  
listen to the sound of  
the TV over the receiver.  
ASSIGN-  
OUT 1 KURO  
COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
2
IN  
3
(
OUT 2  
BD IN  
IN  
1
OPTICAL  
OUT  
HDMI  
ABLE  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
)
LINK  
IN  
1
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
1
3
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
(
)
DVD  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
CD  
TV/SAT  
FRONT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
CD-R/TAPE  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
IN  
2
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
Y
Y
R
PB  
PB  
TV/SAT  
SUBWOOFER  
S
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
A
PB  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
1
2
• When connecting a Blu-ray disc player, connect the  
player to the receiver’s BD IN terminal.  
• If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog  
audio outputs, see Connecting the multichannel  
analog inputs on page 28.  
• When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible  
monitor or a flat screen TV using the HDMI OUT 2  
terminal, switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI  
OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL. See Switching the HDMI  
output on page 65.  
• The sound of the TV cannot be heard over the receiver  
if the TV is connected using an HDMI cable.  
If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the  
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio  
cables.  
• The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an  
HDMI-equipped component is connected.  
• For input components, connections other than HDMI  
connections are also possible (see Connecting your  
DVD player with no HDMI output on page 24).  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output  
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no  
HDMI output) to the receiver.  
DVD player, etc.  
HDMI/DVI-compatible  
monitor or flat screen TV  
Select one  
Select one  
HDMI IN  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
PR  
PB  
Y
ASSIGN-  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO OUT 2  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
HDMI  
ABLE  
IN  
2
)
LINK  
IN  
1
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
2
IN  
1
IN  
3
1
3
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
(
)
VIDEO  
DVR  
ASSIGNABLE  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
IN  
1
IN  
2
CD-R/TAPE  
L
(
)
)
R  
DVD  
Y
R
PB  
SUBWOOFER  
S
ZONE2 ZONE3  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
DVD  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
A
PB  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
1
2
• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the  
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio  
cables.  
• Component video should give superior picture quality  
when compared to composite. You can also take  
advantage of progressive scan video (if your source  
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very  
stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that  
came with your TV and source component to check  
whether they are compatible with progressive-scan  
video.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input  
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the  
receiver.  
• With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cable.  
Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite or component cord.  
DVD player, etc.  
TV  
Select one  
Select one  
AUDIO OUT  
Select one  
VIDEO IN  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
HDMI OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
PB  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
R
L
PR  
ANALOG  
Y
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
PR  
PB  
Y
ASSIGN-  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT 2  
COAXIAL  
IN  
OPTICAL  
HDMI  
ABLE  
)
LINK  
1
IN  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT  
1
3
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
CD-R/TAPE  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
IN  
2
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
Y
R
PB  
SUBWOOFER  
S
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE O  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
A
PB  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
1
2
• Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio  
on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to input  
video signals.  
Depending on the video component, it may not be  
possible to output signals connected by HDMI and  
other methods simultaneously, and it may be  
necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with your component  
for more information.  
• Component video should give superior picture quality  
when compared to composite. You can also take  
advantage of progressive scan video (if your source  
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very  
stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that  
came with your TV and source component to check  
whether they are compatible with progressive-scan  
video.  
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,  
you can connect these instead. See also Connecting  
the multichannel analog inputs on page 28.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
1
• The input functions below are assigned by default to  
the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The  
Input Setup menu on page 40 to change the  
assignments if other connections are used.  
For example, the BD terminal is fixed to BD input; no  
other audio signals can be input to this terminal.  
About HDMI  
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital  
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the  
connected component is compatible with, including  
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby  
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for  
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD and CD. See About the  
video converter on page 22 for more on HDMI  
compatibility.  
Input Terminals  
Input function  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
IN 1  
DVD  
COAX-1  
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface (HDMI™) technology.  
BD  
(BD)  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
OPT-1  
OPT-2  
OPT-3  
This receiver supports the functions described below  
through HDMI connections.  
IN 2  
VIDEO  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
HDMI 3  
• Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents  
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))  
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
(HDMI-3)  
(HDMI-4)  
2
• DeepColor signal transfer  
2
• x.v.Color signal transfer  
• Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio  
signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels  
HDMI 4  
(front panel)  
• Input of the following digital audio formats:  
CD  
COAX-2  
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate  
audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-  
Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD  
• Synchronized operation with components using the  
KURO LINK function (see KURO LINK on page 57)  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing, LLC.  
“x.v.Color” and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
Note  
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content  
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection,  
however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.  
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some  
components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video  
this is not a malfunction.  
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.  
This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make  
sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.  
2 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video sources  
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices,  
including HDD/DVD recorders and VCRs.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The  
Input Setup menu on page 40).  
HDD/DVD recorder, VCR, etc.  
Select one  
Select one  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
Select one  
VIDEO IN  
AUDIO IN  
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
R
L
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT 2  
COAXIAL  
IN  
OPTICAL  
HDMI  
)
LINK  
1
IN  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT  
1
3
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
CD-R/TAPE  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
IN  
2
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
Y
Y
R
PB  
PB  
SUBWOOFER SU  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE O  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
PB  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
1
2
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or  
other set-top box  
Connecting the multichannel analog  
inputs  
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV  
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may  
have 5.1 channel analog outputs. Make sure that the  
player is set to output multichannel analog audio.  
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the  
receiver which input you connected the set-top box to  
(see The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
DVD player, etc.  
STB  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
CENTER  
OUTPUT  
SURROUND  
OUTPUT  
R
SUBWOOFER  
OUTPUT  
R
L
L
Select one  
Select one  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT 2  
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
)
LINK  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
3
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
CD-R/TAPE  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT 2  
COAXIAL  
IN  
OPTICAL  
)
LINK  
1
IN  
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
O
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
SUBWOOFER SU  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT  
IN  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE O  
SPEAK
URROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
E2 ZONE3  
DVD  
N  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
SUBWOOFER  
SUBWOOFER  
S
R
L
R
L
A
T
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE O  
O
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
R
L
R
L
A
1
2
S-VIDEO  
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
• If your player has 7.1-channel analog outputs, the  
player’s surround back output terminals are not  
used. Please refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with your component for more information.  
Connecting other audio components  
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing  
you to connect audio components for playback.  
This receiver features five stereo audio-only inputs. One  
of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with  
audio recorders.  
Most digital components also have analog connections.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the  
receiver which input you connected the component to  
(see also The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
Connecting additional amplifiers  
This receiver has more than enough power for any home  
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every  
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the  
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power  
your speakers.  
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.  
Select one  
Select one  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
L
ANALOG  
R
L
ANALOG  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
L
Front channel  
amplifier  
R
ANALOG  
INPUT  
Center channel  
amplifier (mono)  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
L
ASSIGN-  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT 2  
COAXIAL  
IN  
OPTICAL  
Surround channel  
amplifier  
ABLE  
)
LINK  
1
IN  
2
R
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT  
TICAL  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
VIDEO  
T  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
FR
CENTER  
CD-R/TAPE  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
)
FRONT  
CENTER  
AUDIO  
L
(
L
R
Surround back  
channel amplifier  
O
DVR  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
BWOOFER  
SUBWOOFER  
S
R
OUT  
IN  
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND  
BACK  
MULTI CH IN  
PRE  
PRE OUT  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
FRONT  
CENTER  
ERS  
R
L
R
L
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK /  
B
(
Sin  
R
L
R
L
12 V TRIGGER  
Powered  
subwoofer  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
T
1
2
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround  
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In  
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))  
terminal only.  
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a  
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs  
instead.  
• If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog  
audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the  
recorder.  
• The sound from the surround back terminals will  
depend on how you have configured the Surround  
back speaker setting on page 85.  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder  
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the  
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any  
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.  
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9  
1
Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to  
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using HDMI, coaxial  
or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9  
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected DVD  
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro  
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital  
output.  
If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker  
setting (see Speaker Setting on page 85) to LARGE.  
Note  
1 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be  
downsampled to 48 kHz.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting AM/FM antennas  
03  
Connecting external antennas  
To improve FM reception connect an external FM  
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.  
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna  
as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,  
connect external antennas (see Connecting external  
antennas below).  
75 Ω coaxial cable  
1
2
ANTENNA  
FM UNBAL  
75  
3
ANTENNA  
FM UNBAL  
75  
AM LOOP  
5
AM LOOP  
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of  
vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without  
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.  
4
fig. a  
fig. b  
fig. c  
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally  
outdoors.  
Outdoor  
antenna  
ANTENNA  
1
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
FM UNBAL  
wires.  
75  
2
Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into  
AM LOOP  
each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM  
antenna wires.  
5 m to 6 m  
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.  
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction  
indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the  
stand (fig. b).  
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other  
surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before  
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the  
reception is clear.  
4
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a  
direction giving the best reception.  
5
Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as  
the AM loop antenna.  
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a  
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
MULTI-ZONE setup  
03  
This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-  
ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and  
the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 3)  
Sub zone (ZONE 2)  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
2
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
D
Y
R
PB  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
PB  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
R
S-VIDEO  
PR  
R
L
L
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
RS-232C  
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the  
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source  
can also be used. The main and sub zones have  
independent power (the main zone power can be off  
while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub  
zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel  
controls. However, you may need to specify the volume  
settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 89.  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections  
It is possible to make these connections if you have a  
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub  
1
zone, and a separate amplifier (and speakers) for your  
secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a  
separate amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE  
setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page 32 for  
your primary sub zone. There are two primary sub zone  
setups possible with this system. Choose whichever  
works best for you.  
MULTI-ZONE listening options  
The following table shows the signals that can be output  
to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:  
Sub Zone  
ZONE 2  
Input functions available  
a
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT).  
b
With video signals, the composite video (VIDEO  
ZONE 2 OUT) signals can be output.  
a,c  
ZONE 3  
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT).  
a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI CH IN input.)  
b.JPEG files cannot be played with the USB input.  
c.iPod/USB function cannot be selected for ZONE 3.  
Note  
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub  
zone. You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)  
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3)  
• Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3  
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2  
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT  
jack, both on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.  
OUT jacks on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 3)  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 2)  
BD IN  
IN  
1
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
BD IN  
IN  
1
HDMI  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
IN  
1
IN  
2
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
VIDEO IN  
Y
IN  
1
IN  
2
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
R  
R
Y
PB  
R
ZONE2 ZONE3  
PB  
OUT  
OUT  
P
R
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
OUT  
OUT  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
PB  
AUDIO IN  
R
S-VIDEO  
PB  
PR  
L
AUDIO IN  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
CONTROL  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
RS-232C  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
RS-232C  
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)  
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting  
on page 85 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the  
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling  
the main zone (for example, changing the input function  
or starting playback).  
Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT  
jacks on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the  
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 2)  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
OPTICAL  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
1
3
ANTE  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
CENTER  
IN  
2
AUDIO  
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
L
(
)
Single  
Y
Y
VIDEO IN  
R
R
PB  
PB  
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
R
I
OUND SURROUND  
BACK  
ZONE2 ZONE3 SUR  
DV  
OUT  
PR  
PR  
MONPITORRE OUT  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
D
SURROUND BACK /  
B
(
)
Single  
L
R
L
PB  
S-VIDEO  
L
R
PR  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
RS-232C  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting an IR receiver  
03  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor  
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or  
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote  
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR  
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your  
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of  
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks  
which can be used to link components together so that  
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.  
When you use a remote control, the control signal is  
1
this receiver.  
2
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.  
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on  
the rear of this receiver.  
Important  
Closet or shelving unit  
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you  
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or  
HDMI jacks connected to another component for  
grounding purposes.  
Non-Pioneer  
component  
Pioneer  
component  
1
Decide which component you want to use the  
CONTROL  
IR  
IN  
remote sensor of.  
IN  
OUT  
When you want to control any component in the chain,  
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the  
corresponding remote control.  
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
2
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
Y
Y
R
PB  
PB  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
Y
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
R
PB  
PB  
PB  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
P
R
P
R
MONITOR  
OUT  
PR  
1
T
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
PB  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
1
(
T
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
IR receiver  
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the  
IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the  
IR receiver.  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for  
the type of cable necessary for the connection.  
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR  
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor below to connect to the  
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.  
Continue the chain in the same way for as many  
components as you have.  
Note  
1 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.  
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR  
compatibility.  
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.  
2 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control other components on  
page 67.  
• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the  
remote sensor.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Switching components on and off using  
the 12 volt trigger  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC  
output  
You can connect components in your system (such as a  
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on  
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input  
function. However, you must specify which input  
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup  
menu on page 40. Note that this will only work with  
When using Auto MCACC (page 72) or Acoustic  
Calibration EQ Professional (page 77) to calibrate the  
reverb characteristics of your listening room, the 3D  
graphs of the reverb characteristics in your listening  
room (before and after calibration) can be checked on a  
computer screen by connecting the receiver to the  
computer and using a special application to transfer the  
data. The various MCACC parameters can also be  
checked on the computer.  
1
components that have a standby mode.  
(
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT  
HDMI  
)
LINK  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect  
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C  
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be  
cross type, female–female).  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
2
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
Y
Y
R
PB  
PB  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
OUT IN  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
The software to output the results is available from the  
support area of the Pioneer website (http://  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
www.pioneer.eu). Instructions for using the software are  
also available here. If you have any questions about the  
software, please contact the Pioneer Service Center  
specified on your warranty card.  
P
B
S-VIDEO  
PR  
12 V TRIGGER  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
1
2
Please make sure your system meets the following  
requirements:  
12 V TRIGGER  
INPUT  
• The computer must be a PC functioning with one of  
the following operating systems: Microsoft®  
Windows® Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/  
Ultimate SP1, Windows® XP Professional/Home  
Edition SP3 or Windows® 2000 Professional SP4.  
Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to  
the 12 V trigger of another component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
• The monitor must have a display resolution of 800 x  
600 dots (SVGA) or greater.  
• The computer must be equipped with at least one RS-  
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.  
2
232C port.  
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch  
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on  
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on  
page 40.  
• System must have internet access.  
®
®
®
®
Microsoft , Windows Vista, Windows XP and Windows 2000 are  
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States and/or other countries.  
Note  
1 Triggered connections with up to two devices compatible with 12-volt triggers can be made with this receiver.  
2 Laptops and other computers not equipped with an RS-232C port can be connected via USB port using a commercially available USB to  
RS-232C converter cable (USB to serial converter cable). For instructions on COM port connections and settings, contact the manufacturer  
of your computer.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the  
rear panel of the receiver.  
Make sure that the receiver and all connected  
components are switched off and disconnected from the  
Connecting an HDMI-equipped  
component to the front panel input  
1
There is an HDMI input terminal on the front panel. High  
quality pictures can be viewed via the receiver simply by  
connecting an HDMI-equipped video camera with a  
single HDMI cable. HDMI-equipped components other  
than video cameras can also be connected to this  
terminal.  
power outlet when you do this.  
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-  
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on  
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the  
Advanced MCACC application for more information.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the  
front panel input.  
(
BD IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT 1 KURO  
OUT  
HDMI  
)
LINK  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
• Select this input using INPUT SELECT (remote) or the  
INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select HDMI 4.  
IN  
1
IN  
2
(
)
L
DVD  
(
)
DVR  
Y
Y
R
PB  
PB  
ZONE2 ZONE3  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT VIDEO  
DVR  
OUT IN  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
PR  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
PB  
S-VIDEO  
PR  
VIDEO CAMERA  
12 V TRIGGER  
iPod  
iPhone  
(OUTPUT 12 V  
CONTROL  
IN  
IR  
IN  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
RS-232C  
1
2
This receiver  
RS-232C  
Personal computer  
Video camera, etc.  
Note  
1 The various parameters and the reverb characteristics data used for display on the computer are not cleared when the power is turned off (see  
Output PC on page 81).  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting an iPod  
03  
Connecting a USB device  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow  
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod  
using the controls of this receiver.  
It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on  
the front of this receiver.  
Switch the receiver into standby then connect your  
Switch the receiver into standby then use the  
USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of  
supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod/  
iPhone/USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the  
iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.  
this receiver.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the USB  
terminal.  
• For instructions on playing the USB device, see  
• It is also possible to connect using the cable included  
with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view  
pictures via the receiver.  
Playing a USB device on page 45.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
• For the cable connection, refer to also the operating  
instructions for iPod.  
• For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an  
iPod on page 43.  
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
MASTER  
VOLUME  
This receiver  
USB mass  
storage device  
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
This receiver  
iPod cable  
(supplied)  
MENU  
  
iPod  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Plugging in the receiver  
03  
Only plug in after you have connected all your  
components to this receiver, including the speakers.  
1
Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket  
on the back of the receiver.  
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.1  
CAUTION  
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull  
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the  
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could  
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place  
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the  
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never  
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The  
power cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can  
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the  
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent  
service company for a replacement.  
• Do not use any power cord other than the one  
supplied with this unit.  
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose  
other than that described below.  
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the  
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular  
use, e.g., when on vacation.  
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone  
out before unplugging.  
• If you have connected speakers with a 6 Ω  
impedance, change the impedance setting before  
turning on the power.  
Note  
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any  
operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver  
once it has stopped blinking. When you set the KURO LINK mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the KURO LINK feature,  
see KURO LINK on page 57.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
04  
Chapter 4:  
Basic Setup  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
Switching the speaker impedance  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,  
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you  
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating.  
2
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit  
the current menu.  
STANDBY/ON  
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU  
.
ENTER  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANC  
PQMLCACC  
BAND  
TUNE  
TUNE  
S
HDMI  
PRESET  
PRESET  
TUNER EDIT  
4
Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup  
menu.  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
AUTO SURR/ALC/  
STREAM DIRECT SPEA  
MULTI-ZONE  
S
K
T
E
E
R
R
S
EO  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4c.OSD Language  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
Language  
:
English  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
PHONES  
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
OK  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.  
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,  
5
Select the desired language.  
English  
press STANDBY/ON  
The display shows RESET NO .  
.
French  
German  
Italian  
Spanish  
Dutch  
Use TUNE +/– (or / on the remote control) to select  
SPEAKER 8Ω , and then use PRESET +/– (or /  
on the remote control) to select SPEAKER 8Ω or  
SPEAKER 6Ω.  
SPEAKER 8Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated at 8 Ω or more.  
Russian  
6
Select ‘OK’ to change the language.  
SPEAKER 6Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated at 6 Ω.  
4c.OSD Language  
A/V RECEIVER  
Language  
:
English  
Changing the OSD display language  
(OSD Language)  
OK  
The language used on the Graphical User Interface  
Exit  
Return  
screen can be changed.  
• The explanations in these operating instructions are  
for when English is selected for the GUI screen.  
The setting is completed and the System Setup menu  
reappears automatically.  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
PTY  
SEARCH  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
04  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (Auto MCACC)  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic  
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account  
ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and  
tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you  
have set up the microphone provided with your system,  
the receiver uses the information from a series of test  
tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization  
for your particular room.  
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a  
source on page 42.  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you  
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the  
Important  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
1
microphone.  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the  
microphone is connected.  
2
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the  
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod/  
USB function should not be selected as an input  
function.  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
Surr Back System  
:
Normal  
Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1  
START  
CAUTION  
Exit  
Return  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
3
Select Surr Back System setting,3 select an MCACC  
preset4, press and then select START 5  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
.
RECEIVER  
PARAMETER  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
Select Normal (Surround back), Speaker B, Front Bi-  
Amp or ZONE 2 for the Surr Back System setting  
according to connections to the surround back speaker  
terminals.  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
PTY  
SEARCH  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
4
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re  
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to  
a comfortable volume level.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
2
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
jack on the front panel.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the  
MCACC SETUP MIC jack.  
Note  
1 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.  
2 • You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB input function is selected (in either the main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2, ZONE  
3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 63), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
3 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back  
speaker setting on page 85 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.  
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return, then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 72 for more on this.  
4 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now  
(you can rename it later in Data Management on page 82).  
5 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select Return, then select Auto MCACC to save other correction curves  
(such as ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72 for more on this.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
04  
5
Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the  
6
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
speaker configuration in the GUI screen.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker  
Distance, Standing Wave and Acoustic Cal EQ.  
1
it’s doing this.  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the  
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,  
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this  
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in  
step 6.  
happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.  
7
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and  
the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.3  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver  
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.  
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient  
noise! or Check microphone.) select RETRY after  
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the  
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a  
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using The  
Advanced MCACC menu on page 71 or The system and  
4
the other setup on page 84.  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup  
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto  
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the  
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check  
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,  
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch  
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions  
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Analyzing...  
2/10  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
10  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
:
:
:
OK  
Speaker YES/NO  
OK  
RETRY  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of  
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,  
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.  
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker  
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a  
problem with the speaker connection.  
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power  
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t  
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to  
select the speaker and / to change the setting  
and continue.  
The Input Setup menu  
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu  
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to  
the default settings (see Input function default and  
possible settings on page 41). In this case, you need to  
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which  
terminal so the buttons on the remote control  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring  
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker  
2
connections.  
correspond to the components you’ve connected.  
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,  
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.  
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure  
again.  
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
PARAMETER  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
PTY  
SEARCH  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
Note  
1 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
2 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective  
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.  
3 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 80 for more on this.  
4 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size  
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 84.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking  
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend  
adjusting the settings manually.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
04  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a component to  
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components  
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 34), select  
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding  
trigger setting to switch it on automatically along  
with the (main or sub) zone specified.  
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
2
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
4b.Input Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
INPUT  
Input Name  
Input Skip  
:
:
:
DVD  
Rename  
OFF  
3
4
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU  
.
Digital In  
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1  
---  
Comp-1  
OFF  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
12V Trigger1  
12V Trigger2  
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.  
OFF  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4b.Input Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Exit  
Finish  
a.Manual SP Setup  
INPUT  
Input Name  
Input Skip  
:
:
:
DVD  
Rename  
OFF  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
8
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
Digital In  
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1  
---  
Comp-1  
OFF  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
12V Trigger1  
12V Trigger2  
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
OFF  
Input function default and possible settings  
The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the  
name of one of the input functions. If you have connected  
components to this receiver differently from (or in  
addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu  
on page 40 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up.  
The dots () indicate possible assignments.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
5
Select the input function that you want to set up.  
The default names correspond with the names next to the  
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO)  
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote  
control.  
Input Terminals  
Input  
6
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your  
component.  
function  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
IN 1  
a
DVD  
COAX-1  
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical  
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s  
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical  
input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to 3)  
corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the  
back of the receiver.  
b
BD  
(BD)  
a
TV/SAT  
DVR  
OPT-1  
OPT-2  
OPT-3  
IN 2  
a
a
VIDEO  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
HDMI 3  
HDMI 4  
• If your component is connected via a component  
video cable to an input terminal other than the  
default, you must tell the receiver which input  
terminal your component is connected to, or else you  
may see the S-Video or composite video signals  
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
(HDMI-3)  
b
(HDMI-4)  
1
instead of the component video signals.  
iPod/USB  
CD  
7
When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for  
other inputs.  
There are three optional settings in addition to the  
assignment of the input jacks:  
COAX-2  
CD-R/TAPE  
TUNER  
a
Input Name – You can choose to rename the input  
function for easier identification. Select Rename to  
do so, or Default to return to the system default.  
MULTI CH IN  
a.With KURO LINK set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see  
KURO LINK on page 57).  
b.This assignment is fixed and cannot be changed.  
Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is skipped  
when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT. (DVD  
and other inputs can be still be selected directly with  
the input function buttons.)  
Note  
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options  
on page 61), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Chapter 5:  
Basic playback  
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PLIIx  
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals,  
and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-  
channel signals.  
Playing a source  
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such  
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.  
When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY  
DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
HDD  
DVD  
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
listening mode, check the connections and settings.  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
4
Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is  
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
HDMI OUT  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
1
2
3
Playing a source with HDMI connection  
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.  
Start by switching on the playback component (for  
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you  
Use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI input you’ve  
1
connected to (for example, HDMI 1).  
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).  
You can also perform the same operation by using the  
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing  
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.  
• Make sure the setup microphone is disconnected.  
2
Select the input function you want to play.  
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options  
on page 60 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI  
audio output from your TV or flat screen TV (no sound  
will be heard from this receiver).  
You can use the input function buttons on the remote  
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT  
2
SELECTOR dial.  
3
Press RECEIVER , then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT  
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat  
screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on  
your component or display. Note that some  
components (such as video game units) have  
resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,  
use an analog video connection.  
(
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO  
SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.3  
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound  
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are  
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the  
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.  
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s  
digital out jack.  
• See also Listening to your system on page 50 for  
information on different ways of listening to sources.  
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether  
or not multi-channel playback is being performed  
properly.  
Note  
1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure  
that the VIDEO input is now selected).  
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 55).  
3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby  
Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.  
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be  
set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 50 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround  
sound.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Main Zone:  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as  
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs  
iPod  
A/V RECEIVER  
Playlists  
Artists  
Albums  
Songs  
1
for surround sound playback.  
Podcasts  
Genres  
Composers  
Audiobooks  
1 / 9  
1
Make sure you have set the playback source to the  
proper output setting.  
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to  
output multichannel analog audio.  
iPod CTRL  
Sub Zone:  
2
Use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN.  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
iPod  
panel.  
[
[
Playlists  
Artists  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the  
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be  
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer  
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup  
in Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input  
Setup on page 89.  
[ Albums  
[
[
[
[
[
Songs  
Podcasts  
Genres  
Composers  
Audiobooks  
1/9  
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod  
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage  
of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.  
You can also control all operations for music in the front  
4
Playing an iPod  
panel display of this receiver.  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow  
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod  
using the controls of this receiver.  
Finding what you want to play  
2
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can  
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name,  
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to  
using your iPod directly.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
See Connecting an iPod on page 36.  
• It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod  
itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see  
Switching the iPod controls on page 44.  
1
Use / to select a category, then press ENTER to  
browse that category.  
• To return to the previous level any time, press  
RETURN.  
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the  
receiver to the iPod/USB  
.
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver  
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.  
2
Use / to browse the selected category (e.g.,  
albums).  
When the display shows iPod top menu you’re ready to  
play music from the iPod.  
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.  
3
Note  
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.  
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.  
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 89.  
2 • This system is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano, iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone.  
However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The system is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.  
Compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be sure to use the latest available software  
version.  
• iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.  
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.  
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of  
recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.  
• When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub  
zone from the one playing in the main zone.  
3 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.  
4 • Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.  
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod. To display video clips, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching  
the iPod controls on page 44).  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
Basic playback controls  
want to play, then press  
to start playback.1  
The following table shows the basic playback controls for  
your iPod. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control  
to the iPod/USB operation mode.  
Main Zone:  
Track number  
Track title  
Button  
What it does  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
3:02  
-2:02  
Play mode  
Artist name  
Press to start playback.  
Shuffle On  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
xxxx/xxxx  
If you start playback when something other than a  
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that  
category will play.  
Album title  
iPod  
Now Playing  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Chapter Number : xxx/xxx  
Playing time  
File information  
List  
Pauses/unpauses playback.  
/  
/  
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
iPod CTRL  
Sub Zone:  
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One  
,
Repeat All and Repeat Off  
.
Track number  
Play  
xxxx/xxxx  
Chapxxx/xxx  
File information  
Track title  
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle  
Songs, Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.  
Track Title  
Shuffle On  
-2:02  
Play mode  
Playing time  
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
information displayed in the front panel display.  
3:02  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
Artist name  
Album title  
ENTER  
When browsing, press to move to next levels.  
During playback, press to set the play and pause  
modes.  
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like this:  
RETURN  
When browsing, press to move to previous levels.  
Playlists Songs  
Artists Albums Songs  
Albums Songs  
/  
When browsing, press to move to previous/next  
levels.  
Songs  
/  
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the  
playback speed: Faster Normal Slower  
Podcasts  
Genres Artists Albums Songs  
Composers Albums Songs  
Audiobooks  
TOP MENU  
Press to return to the iPod top menu screen.  
2
Shuffle Songs  
Switching the iPod controls  
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod  
and the receiver.  
Tip  
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.3  
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category  
by selecting the All item at the top of each category  
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a  
particular artist.  
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this  
receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become  
inactive.  
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver  
controls.  
Note  
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.  
2 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.  
3 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver. However, when video clips recorded on the iPod are played, the  
playback picture is displayed.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Playing back audio files stored on a USB  
memory device  
Playing a USB device  
1
The maximum number of levels that you can select in  
Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back  
up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory  
It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on  
the front of this receiver.  
4
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
device.  
2
See Connecting a USB device on page 36.  
1
Use / to select ‘Music’ from the USB Top menu.  
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
receiver to the iPod/USB  
.
Music  
Photos  
Slideshow Setup  
Folder1  
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts  
recognizing the USB device connected. When the  
display shows USB Top menu you’re ready to playback  
from the USB device.  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Music1  
Music2  
Music3  
Music4  
Music5  
1 / 9  
3
1 / 3  
Main Zone:  
Return  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
2
Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to  
Music  
Photos  
browse that folder.  
Slideshow Setup  
• To return to the previous level any time, press  
RETURN.  
1 / 3  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
want to play, then press  
to start playback.  
Main Zone:  
Sub Zone:  
Track number  
USB Top  
[ Music  
[ Photos  
[ Slideshow Setup  
]
]
]
Track title or File name  
Playing time  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
Play mode  
3:02  
-2:02  
Random On  
xxxx/xxxx  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
Artist name  
1/3  
Album title or Folder  
name  
USB  
Important  
Now Playing  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx  
If an Over Current message lights in the display, the  
power requirements of the USB device are too high for  
this receiver. Try following the points below:  
File information  
Return  
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.  
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched  
off.  
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the  
device) for USB power.  
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB  
device is incompatible.  
Note  
1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players  
(MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.  
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for  
any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.  
2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.  
3 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.  
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the GUI screen instead; when neither the  
album name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.  
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.  
• If this error occurs, playback is interrupted and the next playable file is played automatically.  
• This error may occur if the title information is changed on a computer, etc.  
4 • Playback stops when the last song in a USB memory device is played back to the end.  
• When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.  
• This receiver does not support a USB hub.  
• Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.  
• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Sub Zone:  
2
Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to  
browse that folder.  
Track title or File name  
To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.  
Play  
3:02  
xxxx/xxxx  
Track number  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
want to play, then press  
The selected content is displayed in full screen and starts  
a slideshow.  
to start playback.2  
Track Title  
Play mode  
Random On  
-2:02  
Playing time  
Artist name  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles  
between play and pause.  
Album title or Folder  
name  
Basic playback controls  
Basic playback controls  
Button(s) Function  
The following table shows the basic playback controls for  
your USB memory device. Press iPod USB to switch the  
remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.  
ENTER, Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.  
RETURN  
,
Stops the Player and returns to the previous menu.  
Displays the previous photo content  
Display the next photo content  
Button  
What it does  
Press to start playback.  
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow  
Pauses/unpauses playback.  
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
/  
/  
Slideshow Setup  
Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo  
files here.  
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One  
Repeat Folder Repeat All and Repeat Off  
,
,
.
1
Use / to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB  
Press repeatedly to switch between Random On  
and Random Off.  
Top menu.  
USB Top  
Slideshow Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
information displayed in the front panel display.  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
Photos  
Theme  
Interval  
BGM  
Music Select  
Folder1  
:
:
:
:
Normal(OFF)  
5 sec  
ON  
Select  
Slideshow Setup  
ENTER  
When browsing, press to move to next levels.  
During playback, press to set the play and pause  
modes.  
1 / 3  
RETURN  
When browsing, press to move to previous levels.  
Return  
Return  
/  
When browsing, press to move to previous/next  
levels.  
2
Select the setting you want.  
Theme – Add various effects to the slideshow.  
TOP MENU Press to return to the USB Top menu.  
Interval – Set the interval for switching the photos.  
This may not be available depending on the Theme  
setting.  
Playing back photo files stored on a USB  
memory device  
1
BGM – Play music files stored on the USB device  
while displaying photos.  
1
Use / to select ‘Photos’ from the USB Top  
menu.  
Music Select – Select the folder containing the  
music files to be played when BGM is set to ON.  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
Photos  
Slideshow Setup  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the USB Top menu.  
1 / 3  
Note  
1 Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.  
2 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
About playable file formats  
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback  
although they are listed as playable file formats.  
Music files  
Category Extension Stream  
a
.mp3  
MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Layer-3  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
MP3  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
8 bit, 16 bit  
VBR/CBR  
WAV  
.wav  
LPCM  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
2 ch, Monaural  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
b
WMA  
.wma  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
WMA8/9  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
VBR/CBR  
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”  
b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,  
Voice.  
Photo files  
Category Extension  
JPEG  
.jpg  
.jpeg  
.jpe  
.jif  
Format  
Meeting the following conditions:  
• Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF format)  
• Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0  
Resolution  
30 to 8192 pixels vertical, 40 to 8192 pixels horizontal  
.jfif  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
Listening to the radio  
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if  
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and  
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the  
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a  
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can  
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving  
station presets below for more on how to do this.  
necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).  
4
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of  
the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS  
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
HDD  
DVD  
HDMI OUT  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
Saving station presets  
4
5
6
PTY  
SEARCH  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s  
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for  
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.  
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This  
receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven  
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. When saving  
an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see above) is also  
stored.  
7
8
9
HOME  
MENU  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
iPod CTRL  
ENTER  
0
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if  
necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
3
Tune to a station.  
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.  
There are three ways to do this:  
See Listening to the radio above for more on this.  
Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the  
currently selected band, press and hold TUNE /  
for about a second. The receiver will start searching  
for the next station, stopping when it has found one.  
Repeat to search for other stations.  
2
Press T.EDIT TUNER EDIT).  
(
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking  
memory class.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then  
press PRESET / to select the station preset you  
want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a station  
preset.  
Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step  
at a time, press TUNE /.  
High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE / for  
high speed tuning. Release the button at the  
frequency you want.  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the station.  
Improving FM sound  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when  
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press  
MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode.  
This should improve the sound quality and allow you to  
enjoy the broadcast.  
Naming station presets  
For easier identification, you can name your station  
presets.  
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.  
Using Neural THX  
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.  
®
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX technologies  
2
Press T.EDIT TUNER EDIT).  
(
to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.  
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor  
at the first character position.  
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT for Neural THX listening.  
3
Input the name you want.  
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 103 for more  
on this.  
Choose from the following characters for a name up to  
eight characters long.  
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with  
STANDARD.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
Tuning directly to a station  
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the  
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply  
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on  
the remote control.  
!”#$%&’()+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]  
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,  
and ENTER to confirm your selection.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel  
rather than traffic  
NATION M – Popular music in a  
language other than English  
Tip  
announcements  
LEISURE – Leisure interests and ’50s and ’60s  
hobbies  
JAZZ – Jazz  
OLDIES – Popular music from the  
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3  
and input eight spaces instead of a name.  
FOLK M – Folk music  
DOCUMENT – Documentary  
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press  
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display  
between name and frequency.  
COUNTRY – Country music  
Searching for RDS programs  
One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to  
search for a particular kind of radio program. You can  
search for any of the program types listed above.  
Listening to station presets  
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See  
Saving station presets on page 48 if you haven’t done this  
already.  
1
Press TUNER to select the FM band.2  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
2
Press PTY SEARCH  
.
PTY SEARCH shows in the display.  
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station  
is stored.  
3
Press PRESET / to select the program type you  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
want to hear.  
3
Press PRESET / to select the station preset you  
want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
4
Press ENTER to search for the program type.  
The system starts searching through all frequency for a  
match. When it finds one, the search stops and the  
station plays for five seconds.  
control to recall the station preset.  
5
If you want to keep listening to the station, press  
An introduction to RDS  
ENTER within the five seconds.  
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.  
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM  
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of  
information—the name of the station and the kind of  
show they’re broadcasting, for example.  
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find  
that program type at the time of the search.  
3
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of  
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s  
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.  
Displaying RDS information  
Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS  
4
information available.  
1
You can search the following program types:  
Press DISP for RDS information.  
NEWS – News  
EASY M – Easy listening  
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical music  
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical  
music  
Each press changes the display as follows:  
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs  
INFO – General Information  
SPORT – Sport  
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.  
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone  
number as RT.  
EDUCATE – Educational  
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.  
OTHER M – Music not fitting  
above categories  
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio  
CULTURE – National or regional WEATHER – Weather reports  
culture, theater, etc.  
SCIENCE – Science and  
technology  
FINANCE – Stock market reports,  
commerce, trading, etc.  
CHILDREN – Programs for  
children  
station.  
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of  
program currently being broadcast.  
VARIED – Usually talk-based  
material, such as quiz shows or SOCIAL – Social affairs  
• Current tuner frequency.  
interviews.  
POP M – Pop music  
ROCK M – Rock music  
RELIGION – Programs  
concerning religion  
PHONE IN – Public expressing  
their views by phone  
Note  
1 In addition, there are two other program types, TEST and NONE. You can’t search for these.  
2 RDS is only possible in the FM band.  
3 RDS searches all frequency. If the program type could not be found among all frequency, NO PTY is displayed.  
4 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.  
• If you see NO RT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station.  
• If you see NO PS DATA in the PS display, it means no PS data can be received.  
• If you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display, it means no PTY data can be received.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Chapter 6:  
Listening to your system  
Important  
Listening in surround sound  
• The listening modes and many features described in  
this section may not be available depending on the  
current source, settings and status of the receiver.  
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in  
surround sound. However, the options available will  
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source  
you’re listening to.  
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using  
surround back channel processing on page 53.  
Auto playback  
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this  
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option  
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically  
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects  
Standard surround sound  
The following modes provide basic surround sound for  
3
1
stereo and multichannel sources.  
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
HDD  
DVD  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER , then  
press STANDARD STANDARD SURROUND).  
While listening to a source, press  
, then  
RECEIVER  
AUTO SURR ALC STREAM  
DIRECT)2 for auto playback of a source.  
(
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT  
(
/
/
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround  
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before  
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the  
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see  
how the source is being processed.  
encoded, the proper decoding format will  
automatically be selected and shows in the display.  
4
With two channel sources, you can select from:  
• When listening to the FM radio, the Neural THX  
feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural  
THX on page 48 for more on this).  
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to movie sources  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
5
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver  
especially suited to music sources  
equalizes playback sound levels.  
2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to video games  
Tip  
2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound  
from the surround speakers is mono)  
• When an ALC is selected, the effect level can be  
adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the  
Audio options on page 60.  
Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound, especially  
suited to movie sources  
Note  
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround  
sound above for more on these decoding formats).  
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.  
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 53.  
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.  
4 If surround back channel processing (page 53) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if  
the Surround back speaker setting on page 85 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).  
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH,  
DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 60 to adjust them.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound, especially suited  
to music sources  
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA  
2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA  
1
Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially  
suited to music sources  
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
2
With multichannel sources, if you have connected  
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you  
can select (according to format):  
2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES  
4
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available  
when you’re using two surround back speakers)  
THX SELECT2 GAMES  
With multichannel sources, press THX  
(HOME THX  
)
5
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above  
repeatedly to select from:  
Dolby Digital EX Creates surround back channel  
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding  
for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)  
THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
6
4
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA  
DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS-ES encoded sources  
4
THX SELECT2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS encoded sources  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
4
THX SELECT2 MUSIC – This mode is suited not only  
for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but also  
to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-Audio, etc.).  
4
Using the Home THX modes  
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by  
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX  
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like  
what you hear in a cinema.  
THX SELECT2 GAMES – This mode is suited to  
playing the sound of games.  
Using the Advanced surround effects  
Different THX options will be available depending on the  
source and the setting for surround back channel  
processing (see Using surround back channel processing  
on page 53 for more on this).  
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of  
additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced Surround  
modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but  
some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different  
settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
Press RECEIVER , then press THX  
(HOME THX) to  
select a listening mode.3  
Press RECEIVER , then press ADV SURR  
ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a  
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select  
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode  
(see Using surround back channel processing on page 53  
for an explanation of each process):  
(
listening mode.7  
ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic  
soundtracks  
Note  
1 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio  
options on page 60).  
2 Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel  
sources.  
3 • When the function is set to TUNER or iPod/USB, it is not possible to select 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES or THX SELECT2 GAME.  
• When playing an SACD, 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC, Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC and THX SELECT2 MUSIC can be selected.  
4 Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
5 THX CINEMA, THX MUSIC and THX GAMES can be selected when surround back processing is set to SBch OFF, when there is no surround  
back speaker, or when playing 6.1- and 7.1-channel sources.  
6 When playing DTS-encoded sources, Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA can be selected, not THX Surround EX.  
7 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup.  
For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 53.  
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR mode will automatically be selected.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog  
STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround  
settings and you can still use the Midnight,  
Loudness, and Tone functions.  
SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of  
special effects  
F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround  
Advance below for more on this.  
MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono  
soundtracks  
F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround  
Advance below for more on this.  
ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources  
1
EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field  
TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both  
mono and stereo TV sources  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance  
ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games  
SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs  
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to  
create natural surround sound effects using just the front  
speakers and the subwoofer.  
CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock  
and/or pop music  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo  
source, using all of your speakers  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
PHONES SURR – When listening through  
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall  
surround.  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
, then  
While listening to a source, press  
press STEREO to select Front Stage Surround Advance  
modes.  
Tip  
STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on  
this.  
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is  
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the  
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on  
page 60.  
F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround  
sound effect directed to the center of where the front  
left and right speakers sound projection area  
converges.  
Listening in stereo  
F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound  
2
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source  
through just the front left and right speakers (and  
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker  
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro  
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.  
FOCUS position  
(Recommended)  
WIDE position  
Frontright Front left  
speaker speaker  
Frontright  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER , then  
press STEREO for stereo playback.  
Press repeatedly to switch between:  
Note  
1 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).  
2 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC is performed. For  
more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
Using Stream Direct  
06  
• With a 7.1-channel surround system, audio signals  
that have undergone matrix decoding processing  
through surround back channel processing to which  
the Up Mix function is added are output from the  
surround back speakers.  
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the  
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary  
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the  
pure analog or digital sound source.  
HDMI OUT  
THX  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
MPX  
PQLS  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
4
5
6
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
HDD  
DVD  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
7
8
9
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
ENTER  
0
INPUT  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
, then press SBch repeatedly to  
Press  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
cycle the surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
While listening to a source, press  
, then  
RECEIVER  
AUTO SURR ALC STREAM  
DIRECT) to select the mode you want.  
SBch ON Matrix decoding processing for  
generating the surround back component from the  
surround component is turned on.  
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT  
(
/
/
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel  
display to see how the source is being processed.  
SBch AUTO – Matrix decoding processing for  
generating the surround back component from the  
surround component is switched automatically.  
Matrix decoding processing is only performed when  
surround back channel signals are detected in the  
input signals.  
AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 50.  
ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode (page 50).  
DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the  
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker  
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic  
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual  
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay  
settings. You will hear sources according to the  
number of channels in the signal.  
SBch OFF Matrix decoding processing for  
generating the surround back component from the  
surround component is turned off.  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode  
• Default setting: OFF  
PURE DIRECT – Analog sources are heard without  
any digital processing. No sound is output from the  
Speaker B in this mode.  
When you’re not using surround back speakers,  
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround  
back channel through your surround speakers. You can  
choose to listen to sources with no surround back  
channel information, or if the material sounds better in  
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally  
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect  
Using surround back channel  
processing  
1
• Default setting: SBch ON  
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.  
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby  
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use  
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded  
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back  
channel will be generated, but the material may sound  
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally  
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround  
back channel processing off).  
Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround  
back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used  
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)  
VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is  
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for  
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is  
switched off  
Note  
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front Stage  
Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.  
You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front Bi-Amp, Speaker B  
or ZONE 2 is selected at Surr Back System.  
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
Setting the Up Mix function  
06  
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.  
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,  
In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround  
speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening  
position, the surround sound of 5.1-channel sources is  
heard from the side. The Up Mix function mixes the  
sound of the surround speakers with the surround back  
speakers so that the surround sound is heard from  
press STANDBY/ON  
The display shows RESET NO .  
.
Use TUNE +/– (or / on the remote control) to select  
UP MIX ON , and then use PRESET +/– (or / on  
the remote control) to select ON or OFF.  
1
3
Press ENTER to confirm.  
• When set to ON, the UP MIX indicator on the front  
panel lights.  
diagonally to the rear as it should be.  
• Using the Up Mix function is effective when the  
speakers in the 7.1-channel surround system are set  
up as recommended in the example on page 17.  
• Depending on the positions of the speakers and the  
sound source, in some cases it may not be possible  
to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to  
OFF.  
Selecting MCACC presets  
• Default setting: MEMORY 1  
If you have calibrated your system for different listening  
2
positions , you can switch between settings to suit the  
Up Mix OFF  
Up Mix ON  
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting  
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a  
video game close to the TV).  
SW  
C
SW  
C
L
R
L
R
THX  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
HDMI OUT  
1
2
3
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
MPX  
PQLS  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
?
4
5
6
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
SBL  
SBR  
SBL  
SBR  
7
8
9
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
0
REMOTE  
SETUP  
While listening to a source, press  
, then  
RECEIVER  
STANDBY/ON  
press MCACC  
.
3
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets .  
See Data Management on page 82 to check and manage  
your current settings.  
ENTER  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANC  
ACC  
BAND  
TUNE  
TUNE  
PQMLCS  
HDMI  
PRESET  
PRESET  
TUNER EDIT  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
AUTO SURR/ALC/  
STREAM DIRECT SPEA  
MULTI-ZONE  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
S
K
T
E
E
R
REO  
S
PHONES  
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
Note  
1 • Set to ON regardless of this setting when playing DTS-HD signals.  
• May automatically be set to OFF even when set to ON, depending on the input signal and listening mode.  
2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.  
These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72,  
either of which you should have already completed.  
3 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.  
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Choosing the input signal  
Better sound using Phase Control  
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals  
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase  
correction measures to make sure your sound source  
arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing  
unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound.  
1
for the different inputs as described below.  
THX  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
HDMI OUT  
1
2
3
MPX  
PQLS  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency  
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each  
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the  
subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in  
theory, however, this type of processing involves a group  
delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase  
distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or  
muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the  
Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can  
reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the  
quality of the original sound (see illustration below).  
4
5
6
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
0
REMOTE  
SETUP  
Press RECEIVER , then press SIGNAL SEL to select  
the input signal corresponding to the source  
component.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal  
in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.  
ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.  
Phase Control OFF  
DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.  
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
2
HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.  
3
PCM – For PCM input signals. The receiver selects  
the first available signal in the following order: HDMI;  
DIGITAL.  
Sound  
source  
Sound muffled due  
to a delay in time  
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, the indicators light  
according to the signal being decoded, as follows:  
Subwoofer  
2 DIGITAL lights with Dolby Digital decoding.  
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear  
• Bass sound with loss of depth  
2 DIGITAL PLUS lights with Dolby Digital Plus  
decoding.  
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality  
2 TrueHD lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.  
DTS lights with DTS decoding.  
Phase Control ON  
DTS HD lights with DTS-HD decoding.  
MSTR lights with DTS-HD Master Audio decoding.  
96/24 lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.  
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
WMA9 Pro lights to indicate that a WMA9 Pro signal  
is being decoded.  
Sound  
Original sound  
preserved with no  
loss of clarity  
HDMI is not assigned by default. To select an HDMI  
signal, conduct the input setup procedure (see The  
Input Setup menu on page 40).  
source  
Subwoofer  
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity  
• Bass sound with no loss of depth  
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality  
Note  
1 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats.  
The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,  
DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the  
MULTI CH IN and TUNER).  
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital  
connections (page 28) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.  
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.  
2 When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.  
3 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.  
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound  
1
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an  
optimal sound image. The default setting is on and we  
recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all  
sound sources.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
Press  
, then press PHASE CTRL (PHASE  
CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.  
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.  
Note  
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough  
together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will  
be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.  
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.  
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE  
CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also  
recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.  
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher  
value.  
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.  
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:  
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.  
– When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 60.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KURO LINK  
07  
Chapter 7:  
KURO LINK  
Synchronized operation with a KURO LINK-compatible  
Pioneer flat screen TV or Blu-ray disc player or with a  
component of another make that supports the KURO  
LINK function is possible when the component is  
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.  
• To use the KURO LINK function, connect this  
receiver and flat screen TV using the HDMI OUT 1  
terminal. Connecting the KURO LINK compatible  
component using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal may  
result in malfunction. If this happens, turn off the  
KURO LINK compatible component’s KURO LINK  
setting.  
For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer  
to also the operating instructions for each component.  
• While the receiver is equipped with four HDMI inputs,  
the KURO LINK function can only be used with up to  
three DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three DVD  
or Blu-ray disc recorders.  
• You cannot use this function with components that  
do not support KURO LINK.  
• We do not guarantee this receiver will work with  
Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible components or  
components of other makes that support the KURO  
LINK function. We do not guarantee that all  
synchronized operations will work with components  
of other makes that support the KURO LINK function.  
Cautions on the KURO LINK function  
• Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a  
direct connection with other amps or an AV converter  
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational  
errors.  
• Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable when you want to  
use the KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK  
function may not work properly if a different type of  
HDMI cable is used.  
• Only connect components (Blu-ray disc player, etc.)  
you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of  
this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with  
other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI  
switch) can cause operational errors.  
Making the KURO LINK connections  
• When KURO LINK is set to ON, HDMI Input is  
automatically set to OFF.  
You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat  
screen TV and up to four other components.  
• If a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND,  
ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected  
while the PQLS effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is  
disabled.  
Be sure to connect the flat screen TV’s audio cable to the  
audio input of this unit.  
For details, see Connecting your TV and playback  
components on page 23.  
• When this receiver is connected by HDMI cable to a  
Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS  
function via HDMI connection and HDMI  
Important  
reauthentication is performed (the HDMI indicator  
blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening  
mode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode  
other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE  
DIRECT or STEREO is selected.  
• When connecting this system or changing  
connections, be sure to switch the power off and  
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.  
After completing all connections, connect the power  
cords to the wall socket.  
• When the receiver’s KURO LINK is turned ON, even  
if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is  
possible to output the audio and video signals from a  
player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound  
from the receiver, but only when a KURO LINK-  
compatible component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) and  
compatible TV are connected. In this case, the  
receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI  
indicators light.  
• After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2  
second to 10 second HDMI initialization process  
begins. You cannot carry out any operations during  
initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit  
blinks during initialization, and you can turn this  
receiver on once it has stopped blinking.  
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend  
that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat  
screen TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on  
this receiver.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KURO LINK  
07  
About connections with a product of a  
different brand that supports the KURO LINK  
function  
The synchronized operations below can be used when  
the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a TV  
of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the KURO  
LINK function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of  
the KURO LINK functions may not work.)  
KURO LINK Setup  
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as  
KURO LINK-compatible connected components in order to  
make use of the KURO LINK function. For more information  
see the operating instructions for each component.  
TV/DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
• You can set whether to output the sound over the  
speakers connected to the receiver or over the TV’s  
speakers using the TV’s menu screen.  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
PTY  
SEARCH  
• You can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the  
sound using the TV’s remote control.  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s  
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for  
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV.)  
1
2
3
Press RECEIVER , then press Home Menu  
Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER  
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
.
.
• The sound of TV programs or an external input  
connected to the TV can also be output from the  
speakers connected to the receiver. (This requires  
connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in addition  
to the HDMI cable.)  
4d.Other Setup  
4d1.KURO LINK Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
KURO LINK  
:
:
ON  
Display Power Off  
YES  
The synchronized operations below can be used when  
the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a  
player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that  
supports the KURO LINK function.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
4
Select the ‘KURO LINK’ setting you want.  
• When playback starts on the player or recorder, the  
receiver’s input switches to the HDMI input to which  
that component is connected.  
Choose whether to set this unit’s KURO LINK function  
ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the KURO  
LINK function.  
See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the  
models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support  
the KURO LINK function.  
When using a component that does not support the  
KURO LINK function, set this to OFF.  
ON – Enables the KURO LINK function. When this  
unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported  
source begin playback while using the KURO LINK  
function, the audio and video output from the HDMI  
connection are output from the flat screen TV.  
OFF – The KURO LINK is disabled. Synchronized  
operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is  
turned off, audio and video of sources connected via  
HDMI are not output.  
5
Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.  
If the TV’s power is turned off while using the KURO LINK  
function, the receiver’s power is also turned off (all power  
off function). This function can be disabled.  
YES – The all power off function is enabled. The  
receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power.  
This function only works when the input for a  
component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV.  
NO – The all power off function is disabled. The  
receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power  
is turned off.  
6
When you’re finished, press HOME MENU  
.
You will finish to HOME MENU.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KURO LINK  
07  
Setting the PQLS function  
Synchronized amp mode  
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio  
signal transfer control technology using the KURO LINK  
function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by  
controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS  
compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that  
has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is  
generated upon transmission.  
The synchronized amp mode can be set from the KURO  
LINK-compatible TV’s remote control. See the  
explanation below for operations in the synchronized  
amp mode.  
These functions are set from the TV’s menu screen. For  
more information, refer to the operating instructions of  
the KURO LINK-compatible TV.  
• On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround,  
PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio  
output to Linear PCM.  
Synchronized amp mode operations  
When using the synchronized amp mode, the KURO  
LINK-compatible component connected to the receiver  
operates in sync as described below.  
• On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio, PQLS  
only works when playing CDs.  
• The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can  
be muted using the TV’s remote control.  
To use the PQLS function, set PQLS in the player’s Setup  
Navigator to AUTO.  
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s  
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for  
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV.)  
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
your player for more information.  
This function is activated when KURO LINK is set to ON.  
THX  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the  
KURO LINK-compatible component is played.  
MPX  
PQLS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the  
TV’s channel is switched.  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
• The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if  
the receiver’s input is switched to a component other  
than one connected by HDMI.  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
The operations below can also be used on Pioneer KURO  
LINK-compatible flat screen TVs.  
Press  
, then press PQLS to select PQLS  
RECEIVER  
setting.  
• When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound  
is muted, the volume status is displayed on the flat  
screen TV’s screen.  
The setting is displayed on the front panel display.  
PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz  
controller in this receiver eliminates distortion  
caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best  
possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use  
the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function  
for PQLS-compatible players.  
• When the OSD language is switched on the flat  
screen TV, the receiver’s language setting also  
switches accordingly.  
Canceling synchronized amp mode  
• When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the  
receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an  
HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.  
PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.  
Before using synchronization  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the  
synchronized amp mode is canceled when the  
receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the  
synchronized amp mode back on, select the  
synchronized amp mode using the TV’s remote  
control.  
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you  
must:  
1
Put all components into standby mode.  
2
Turn the power on for all components, with the  
power for the flat screen TV being turned on last.  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the  
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation  
that produces sound from the TV is performed from  
the TV’s menu screen, if the receiver’s HDMI output  
setting is changed, etc.  
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is  
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from  
connected components displays properly on the screen  
or not.  
4
Check whether the components connected to all  
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
08  
Chapter 8:  
Using other functions  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
BYPASS  
ON  
b
Setting the Audio options  
Applies the treble and bass tone  
controls to a source, or bypasses  
them completely.  
TONE  
(Tone  
Control)  
There are a number of additional sound settings you can  
make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The  
defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.  
c
Adjusts the amount of bass.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
Default: 0 (dB)  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
Default: 0 (dB)  
BASS  
c
Adjusts the amount of treble.  
Important  
TREBLE  
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO  
PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the  
current source, settings and status of the receiver.  
d
S.RTRV  
(Sound  
With the Sound Retriever  
function, DSP processing is used  
OFF  
ON  
Retriever) to compensate for the loss of  
audio data upon compression,  
improving the sound’s sense of  
density and modulation.  
RECEIVER  
, then press AUDIO PARAMETER.  
1
2
Press  
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.  
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
DNR  
(Digital  
Noise  
May improve the quality of sound  
in a noisy source (for example,  
video tape with lots of background  
OFF  
ON  
Reduction) noise) when switched on.  
3
Use / to set it as necessary.  
DIALOG E. Localizes dialog in the center  
OFF  
See the table below for the options available for each  
setting.  
(Dialog  
channel to make it stand out from  
ON  
Enhancem other background sounds in a TV  
ent)  
or movie soundtrack.  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
DUAL  
(Dual  
Mono)  
Specifies how dual mono  
encoded Dolby Digital  
soundtracks should be played.  
Dual mono is not widely used, but  
is sometimes necessary when  
two languages need to be sent to  
separate channels.  
CH1Channel  
1 is heard only  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
MCACC  
(MCACC  
preset)  
Selects your favorite MCACC  
preset memory when multiple  
preset memoriesare saved. When M6. MEMORY 6  
an MCACC preset memory has  
been renamed, the given name is  
displayed.  
M1. MEMORY 1  
CH2Channel  
2 is heard only  
to  
CH1 CH2 –  
Both channels  
heard from  
Default:  
M1. MEMORY 1  
front speakers  
EQ  
Switches on/off the effects of EQ  
Pro.  
ON  
e
(Acoustic  
Calibration  
EQ)  
DRC  
Adjusts the level of dynamic  
a
AUTO  
OFF  
(Dynamic range for movie soundtracks  
Range  
Control)  
MAX  
MID  
OFF  
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,  
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,  
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master  
Audio (you may need to use this  
feature when listening to  
S-WAVE  
Switches on/off the effects of  
ON  
(Standing Standing Wave Control.  
Wave)  
OFF  
DELAY  
(Sound  
Delay)  
Some monitors have a slight  
delay when showing video, so the  
soundtrack will be slightly out of  
sync with the picture. By adding a  
bit of delay, you can adjust the  
sound to match the presentation  
of the video.  
0.0 to 10.0  
(frames)  
surround sound at low volumes).  
LFE  
(LFE  
Some Dolby Digital and DTS  
audio sources include ultra-low  
0dB/ –5dB/  
–10dB/ –15dB/  
–20dB  
1 second = 25  
frames (PAL)  
Attenuate) bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator  
as necessary to prevent the ultra-  
low bass tones from distorting the  
sound from the speakers.  
Default: 0.0  
OFF  
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective  
surround sound of movies at low  
volumes.  
MIDNIGHT/  
LOUDNESS  
OFF  
The LFE is not limited when set to  
0 dB, which is the recommended  
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,  
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is  
limited by the respective degree.  
When OFF is selected, no sound  
is output from the LFE channel.  
MIDNIGHT ON  
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble  
from music sources at low  
volumes.  
LOUDNESS  
ON  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
08  
f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD  
discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting  
back to 0 dB.  
g.• HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing  
synchronized amp mode operations.  
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play  
the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with  
the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp  
mode on page 59.  
h.This feature is only available when the connected display supports  
the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’) for  
HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.  
DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details  
about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer  
directly.  
Setting  
SACD  
What it does  
Option(s)  
0dB  
Brings out detail in SACDs by  
maximizing the dynamic range  
(during digital processing).  
f
GAIN  
+6 dB  
g
Specifies the routing of the HDMI  
audio signal out of this receiver  
(amp) or through to a TV or flat  
screen TV. When THROUGH is  
selected, no sound is output from  
this receiver.  
AMPLIFIER  
HDMI  
(HDMI  
Audio)  
THROUGH  
A. DELAY This feature automatically  
(Auto  
delay)  
OFF  
corrects the audio-to-video delay  
between components connected  
with an HDMI cable. The audio  
delay time is set depending on the  
operational status of the display  
connected with an HDMI cable.  
The video delay time is  
ON  
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.  
j. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA  
mode.  
automatically adjusted according  
Setting the Video options  
h
to the audio delay time.  
There are a number of additional picture settings you can  
make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults,  
if not stated, are listed in bold.  
i
Provides a better blend of the  
front speakers by spreading the  
center channel between the front  
right and left speakers, making it  
sound wider (higher settings) or  
narrower (lower settings).  
0 to 7  
C. WIDTH  
(Center  
Width)  
Default: 3  
(Applicable  
only when  
using a  
center  
speaker)  
Important  
• Note that if an option cannot be selected on the  
VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to  
the current source, setting and status of the receiver.  
DIMENSIONi  
Adjusts the depth of the surround  
sound balance from front to back,  
making the sound more distant  
(minus settings), or more forward  
(positive settings).  
–3 to +3  
• The VIDEO PARAMETER menu cannot be used  
when the input function is set to iPod/USB, CD, CD-  
R, TUNER, BD or HDMI 1 to 4.  
Default: 0  
RECEIVER  
, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.  
1
2
Press  
i
Extends the front stereo image to  
include the surround speakers for  
a ‘wraparound’ effect.  
OFF  
PANORAMA  
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.  
ON  
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
j
Adjusts the center image to  
create a wider stereo effect with  
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0  
(all center channel sent to front  
right and left speakers) to 10  
(center channel sent to the center  
speaker only).  
0 to 10  
C. IMAGE  
(Center  
Image)  
(Applicable  
only when  
using a  
Defaults:  
Neo:6 MUSIC:  
3
Neo:6  
CINEMA: 10  
3
Use / to set it as necessary.  
See the table below for the options available for each  
1
setting.  
center  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
speaker)  
Setting  
V. CONV  
What it does  
Option(s)  
EFFECT  
Sets the effect level for the  
currently selected Advanced  
Surround or ALC mode (each  
mode can be set separately).  
10 to 90  
Converts video signals for output  
ON  
(DigitalVideo from the MONITOR OUT jacks  
Conversion) (including HDMI OUT connector)  
for all video types (see page 22).  
OFF  
a.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light.  
b.This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is Stereo,  
Auto surround (STEREO) or ALC (STEREO).  
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.  
d.With the iPod/USB input function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON.  
e.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals.  
Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.  
a
Specifies the output resolution of  
the video signal (when analog  
video input signals are output at  
the HDMI OUT connector, select  
this according to the resolution of  
your monitor and the images you  
wish to watch).  
AUTO  
PURE  
RES  
(Resolution)  
480p/576p  
720p  
1080i  
1080p  
Note  
1 • All of the setting items can be set for each input function.  
• Setting items other than V. CONV can only be selected when V. CONV is set to ON.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
08  
c.This setting is only displayed when 480i or 576i video signals are  
being input.  
d.If the picture does not display properly when PAL is selected, select  
AUTO or OFF.  
e.This setting is only valid for component outputs.  
f. This setting is not valid for HDMI outputs.  
g.This setting is not displayed for component inputs.  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
THROUGH  
NORMAL  
b
Specifies the aspect ratio when  
analog video input signals are  
output at the HDMI output. Make  
your desired settings while  
checking each setting on your  
display (if the image doesn’t match  
your monitor type, cropping or  
black bands appear).  
ASP  
(Aspect)  
c,d,e  
This setting optimizes the picture  
for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive.  
Usually set to AUTO; but try  
switching to OFF if the picture  
appears unnatural.  
AUTO  
PAL  
PCINEMA  
(PureCinema)  
OFF  
Additionally, certain PAL movie  
video (576i, 25 frames/second STB  
video output or DVD disc playback,  
etc.) that contain film progressive  
material cannot be recognized as  
such by this receiver. In such  
instances, if you choose PAL,  
PureCinema mode is activated.  
c,e  
Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to  
progressive.  
–4 to +4  
P.MOTION  
(Progressive  
Default: 0  
Motion)  
c
Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the Y  
(brightness) component.  
0 to +8  
YNR  
Default: 0  
c
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
–4 to +4  
Default: 0  
–4 to +4  
Default: 0  
DETAIL  
c,f  
Adjusts the sharpness of the high-  
frequency (detailed) elements in  
the picture.  
SHARP  
(Sharpness)  
c
Adjusts the overall brightness.  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
BRIGHT  
(Brightness)  
c
Adjusts the contrast between light  
and dark.  
CONTRAST  
c,g  
Adjusts the red/green balance.  
HUE  
c
Adjusts saturation from dull to  
bright.  
CHROMA  
(Chroma  
Level)  
a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not  
compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will  
be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change  
the setting.  
• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically  
according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI.  
When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same  
resolution as when input (At this time, video signals are only output  
from the same type of terminals to which they were input).  
• When a display is connected by HDMI, if this is set to something  
other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p  
signals are output from the component output terminals.  
b.• If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect  
ratio on the source component or on the monitor.  
NORMAL setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video  
signals are being input.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
08  
Switching the speaker system  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls  
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker  
setting on page 85, three speaker system settings are  
possible using SPEAKERS. If you selected Normal, Front  
Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your  
main speaker system on or off. The options below are for  
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust  
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-  
ZONE remote controls on page 64.  
VSX-LX52  
1
the Speaker B setting only.  
STANDBY/ON  
ENTER  
VSX-LX52  
BAND  
TUNEPQLS  
HDMI  
PRESET  
PRESET  
TUNER EDIT  
MULTI-ZONE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
SPEAKERS  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
ENTER  
PQLS  
HDMI  
PRESET  
PRESET  
TUNER EDIT  
VANCED  
RROUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
MULTI-ZONE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
HOME THX  
SPEAKERS  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
PHONES  
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
VIDEO CAMERA  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
1
Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.  
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:  
ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub  
zone  
Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a  
speaker system setting.  
ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones  
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal, the  
button will simply switch your main speaker system (A)  
on or off.  
ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub  
zone  
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:  
MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE  
feature off  
SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and  
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.  
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE  
control has been switched ON.  
SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers  
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel  
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output  
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.  
2
Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to  
select the sub zone(s) you want.  
If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle  
between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.  
SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up  
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two  
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.  
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as  
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel  
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).  
2
• When the receiver is on, make sure that any  
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and  
your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this  
is not showing, the front panel controls affect the  
main zone only.  
SP(off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The  
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals  
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as  
when selecting speaker system A (above).  
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source  
for the zone you have selected.  
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected  
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.  
• If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner controls  
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets  
3
on page 48 if you’re unsure how to do this).  
Note  
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 84. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound  
is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).  
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 85 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.  
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.  
2 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.  
3 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other  
zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
08  
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the  
For more information about video connections, see  
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video  
sources on page 27.  
volume for the zone you have selected.  
This is only possible if you selected the Variable volume  
control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 89.  
1
DVD  
BD  
DVR  
HDMI  
TV/DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
5
When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE  
TV  
CD  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.  
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front  
panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
2
REMOTE  
SETUP  
HDMI OUT  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MULTI-ZONE remote controls  
MAIN  
4
5
6
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE  
3 to operate the corresponding zone.  
1
Select the source you want to record.  
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT SELECT).  
RECEIVER  
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE  
remote controls:  
• If necessary, press  
, then press SIGNAL  
SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the  
source component (see Choosing the input signal on  
page 55 for more on this).  
Button  
What it does  
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.  
INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function in the sub  
2
Prepare the source you want to record.  
zone.  
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.  
Input function Use to select the input function directly (this  
3
Prepare the recorder.  
buttons  
may not work for some functions) in the sub  
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording  
zone.  
device and set the recording levels.  
MASTER  
VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume in the sub  
zone.  
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if  
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set  
the audio recording level automatically—check the  
component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.  
Making an audio or a video recording  
You can make an audio or a video recording from the  
4
Start recording, then start playback of the source  
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source  
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).  
component.  
3
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an  
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the  
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in  
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 14 for more on connections).  
Reducing the level of an analog signal  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog  
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find  
that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear  
4
distortion in the sound.  
Since the video converter is not available when making  
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use  
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder  
as you used to connect your video source (the one you  
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must  
connect your recorder using Component video if your  
source has also been connected using Component video.  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
4
5
6
REMOTE  
SETUP  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
ENTER  
0
RECEIVER  
, then press A.ATT to switch the  
Press  
input attenuator on or off.  
Note  
1 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.  
2 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.  
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in  
standby.  
3 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.  
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.  
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.  
4 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
Using the sleep timer  
08  
Switching the HDMI output  
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a  
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without  
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use  
the remote control to set the sleep timer.  
Set which terminal to use when outputting video and  
audio signals from the HDMI output terminals (HDMI  
OUT ALL, HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2).  
The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the KURO  
LINK function.  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
1
2
3
HDMI OUT  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
REMOTE  
SETUP  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
TV CTRL  
4
5
6
7
8
9
REMOTE  
SETUP  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
ENTER  
7
8
9
0
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
ENTER  
0
RECEIVER  
, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set  
Press  
the sleep time.  
Press RECEIVER , then press HDMI OUT  
Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed.  
The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL HDMI OUT 1  
.
30 min  
Off  
60 min  
90 min  
,
2
and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed.  
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time  
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will  
cycle through the sleep options again.  
Checking your system settings  
1
Use the status display screen to check your current  
settings for features such as surround back channel  
processing and your current MCACC preset.  
Dimming the display  
THX  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
You can choose between four brightness levels for the  
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the  
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.  
MPX  
PQLS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
4
5
6
REMOTE  
SETUP  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
RECEIVER  
system settings.  
These appear on the front panel display.  
1
Press  
, then press STATUS to check the  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
3
MAIN  
ENTER  
0
The front panel display shows each of the following  
settings for three seconds each:  
Input function  
RECEIVER  
, then press DIMMER repeatedly to  
change the brightness of the front panel display.  
Press  
Sampling Frequency  
Surround Back channel Processing  
MCACC preset  
ZONE 2 input  
ZONE 3 input  
KURO LINK  
HDMI OUT  
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to  
switch off the display.  
Note  
1 • You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.  
• The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.  
2 • Synchronized amp mode on page 59 is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch  
to HDMI OUT 1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the flat screen TV using the flat screen TV’s remote control.  
• When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output, the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMI3, or BD.  
3 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
Resetting the system  
08  
Setting  
Default  
DSP  
Surround back channel Processing  
ON  
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to  
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.  
Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF.  
Phase Control  
ON  
iPod/USB function  
Sound Retriever  
ON  
• Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from  
Other functions  
OFF  
the receiver beforehand.  
Sound Delay  
Dual Mono  
DRC  
0.0 frame  
CH1  
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.  
AUTO  
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,  
SACD Gain  
LFE Attenuate  
Auto delay  
Up Mix  
0 dB  
press STANDBY/ON  
.
0 dB  
The display shows RESET NO .  
OFF  
3
Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET +/–, then press ENTER  
on the front panel.  
The display shows RESET? OK.  
ON  
Digital Safety  
Effect Level  
OFF  
ExtendedStereo  
Other modes  
Center Width  
Dimension  
90  
4
Press ENTER to confirm.  
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver  
has been reset to the factory default settings.  
50  
2 PL II Music  
Options  
3
0
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the  
receiver is unplugged.  
Panorama  
OFF  
Neo:6 Options  
Center Image  
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3  
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10  
Default system settings  
Setting  
All Inputs  
Listening Mode  
(2 ch)  
AUTO  
SURROUND  
Default  
ON  
Digital Video Conversion  
SPEAKERS  
Listening Mode  
(x ch)  
AUTO  
SURROUND  
A
Surround Back System  
Normal  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALLx2  
YES  
Listening Mode (HP) STEREO  
Speaker System  
Front  
See also Setting the Audio options on page 60 for other default  
DSP settings.  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
MCACC  
MCACC Position Memory  
Channel Level (M1 to M6)  
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)  
M1: MEMORY 1  
0.0 dB  
SW  
3.00 m  
Crossover  
X-Curve  
80 Hz  
Standing Wave  
(M1 to M6)  
ATT of all channels/ 0.0 dB  
filters  
OFF  
THX Audio Setting  
DIMMER  
1.2 m<  
Medium bright  
SWch Wide Trim  
0.0 dB  
EQ Data (M1 to M6)  
All channels/bands 0.0 dB  
EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB  
Inputs  
See Input function default and possible settings on page 41.  
MULTI-ZONE  
ZONE 2/3 Volume Level  
ZONE 2/3 Volume  
HDMI  
Variable  
–60 dB  
HDMI Audio  
Amp  
HDMI output  
KURO LINK  
HDMI OUT ALL  
ON  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Chapter 9:  
Controlling the rest of your system  
Operating multiple receivers  
Setting the remote to control other  
components  
The remote control included with this receiver can be  
used to operate up to three other receivers (of the same  
model as this receiver) in addition to this receiver. The  
receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the  
preset code to set the remote control setting.  
Most components can be assigned to one of the input  
function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the  
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the  
remote.  
• Set the remote modes on the receivers before using  
this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on  
page 90).  
However, there are cases where only certain functions  
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset  
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote  
control will not work for the model that you are using.  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
4
5
6
Note  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
. To go back a step, press RETURN.  
RECEIVER  
ENTER  
0
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote  
automatically exits the operation.  
1
2
3
Check the operation selector switch to MAIN  
RECEIVER  
.
Press  
.
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
Selecting preset codes directly  
the LED flashes twice.  
1
Press the input function button for the component  
4
Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset  
you want to control.1  
code (see below).  
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV  
CTRL here.  
• Receiver 1: 6 1 9 3 5 (Default)  
• Receiver 2: 6 2 6 3 0  
• Receiver 3: 6 2 6 3 1  
• Receiver 4: 6 2 6 3 2  
2
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
the LED flashes twice.  
3
Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset  
When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes once  
to indicate that the setting is completed.  
code.  
See Preset code list on page 105.  
To operate another receiver, start over from step 1 to  
input its preset code.  
When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes once  
to indicate that the setting is completed.  
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other components  
you want to control.  
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or  
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t  
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there  
is one).  
Note  
1 You can’t assign RECEIVER , TUNER or iPod/USB.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
Resetting the remote control presets  
09  
Controls the components  
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and  
This remote control can control components after  
entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to  
control other components on page 67 for more on this).  
Use the input function buttons to select the component.  
programmed buttons.  
1
2
3
Check the operation selector switch to MAIN  
Press RECEIVER  
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
.
.
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are  
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the  
TV CTRL button.  
the LED flashes twice.  
4
Use the number buttons to enter 9, 8, 1.  
The LED flashes four times to indicate that the resetting  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
is completed.  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
Default preset codes  
Input function button Preset code  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
DVD  
BD  
3 1 5 7 1  
3 2 4 4 2  
2 2 3 0 6  
3 2 4 4 2  
1 3 0 0 0  
7 0 4 6 8  
7 1 0 8 7  
2 0 0 5 8  
1 3 0 0 0  
6 1 9 3 5  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
DVR  
HDMI  
TV  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
4
5
6
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
CD  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
0
INPUT  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
TV CTRL  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
TV CONTROL  
CH  
VOL  
RECEIVER  
MUTE  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
RETURN  
PTY  
SEARCH  
HOME  
MENU  
TUNE  
iPod CTRL  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
TV/DTV  
AUDIO  
MPX  
PQLS  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
RECEIVER  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Button(s)  
TV  
TV (Monitor)  
BD/DVD  
HDD/DVR  
VCR  
SAT/CATV  
SOURCE  
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF  
Number buttons numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
CLEAR  
numerics  
+
numerics  
numerics  
(dot)  
(dot)  
KURO LINK  
CH ENTER  
-
-
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
(CLASS)  
EXIT/INFO  
EXIT  
TOP MENU  
TOOLS  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
-
-
LIST  
TOOLS/GUIDE/  
EPG  
USER MENU  
GUIDE  
///  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
-
-
-
///  
ENTER  
ENTER  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME / MENU  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RETURN  
-
RETURN  
HDD (Red)  
DVD (Green)  
(Yellow)  
(Blue)  
Red  
Red  
-
HDD  
DVD  
VCR  
MENU  
-
Red  
Green  
Green  
-
-
Green  
Yellow  
Blue  
Yellow  
Yellow  
-
-
Blue  
Blue  
MENU  
-
-
-
-
AUTO SETUP  
-
FREEZE  
-
-
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
-
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH+/  
-
-
-
TV/DTV  
-
AV SELECTION  
SCREEN SIZE  
AUDIO  
-
-
AUDIO  
DISP  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH+/  
-
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY/INFO  
CH+/  
RECORD  
DISPLAY  
CH+/  
-
CH +/–  
+   
CH+/  
-
-
-
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Button(s)  
LD  
CD/CD-R/SACD  
MD/DAT  
TAPE  
Button(s)  
TV (Projector)  
POWER ON  
MOVIE  
SOURCE  
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF  
SOURCE  
Number buttons numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
-
1
b
(dot)  
+10  
>10/CLEAR  
DISK/ENTER  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
2
STANDARD  
DYNAMIC  
USER1  
b
ENTER  
(CLASS)  
ENTER  
OPEN/CLOSE  
3
4
TOP MENU  
-
-
-
-
MS  
5
USER2  
6
USER3  
a
MS  
LEGATO LINK  
7
COLOR+  
SHARP+  
GAMMA  
COLOR  
///  
///  
-
-
-
-
///  
8
ENTER  
ENTER  
-
-
-
9
a
SACD SETUP  
-
0
(dot)  
SHARP  
RETURN  
-
-
-
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP  
EXIT  
INFO  
AUDIO  
DISP  
-
-
///  
///  
ENTER  
ENTER  
TEST  
a
HIDE  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY/INFO  
PURE AUDIO  
a
TIME  
-
-
MENU  
a. Controls for SACD.  
b. Controls for MD.  
HDMI1  
HDMI2  
COMP.  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
BRIGHT  
BRIGHT+  
POWER OFF  
ASPECT  
CONTRAST+/  
AUDIO  
DISP  
CH +/–  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
Chapter 10:  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
3
Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the HOME MENU,  
then press ENTER  
.
Making receiver settings from the  
Advanced MCACC menu  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic  
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s  
laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home  
users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a  
studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic  
characteristics of the listening environment are  
measured and the frequency response is calibrated  
accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis  
and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it  
closer to a studio environment than ever before.  
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate  
standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing  
wave control function using a unique process to perform  
acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.  
Exit  
Return  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
1.Advanced MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
Exit  
Return  
This section describes how to calibrate the sound field  
automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data  
manually.  
Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 for a quick  
and effective automatic surround setup.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
TV/DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
page 72 for a more detailed MCACC setup.  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings  
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see  
Manual MCACC setup on page 74).  
PTY  
SEARCH  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur.  
When the speakers are connected to this receiver,  
the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to  
cancel the test tone.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
1
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,  
disconnect them.  
2
Press  
on the remote control, then press  
RECEIVER  
HOME MENU 2  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME  
MENU.  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the HOME MENU.  
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB input function is selected (in either the main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2, ZONE  
3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 63), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Automatic MCACC (Expert)  
10  
2
Select the parameters you want to set.  
Use / to select the item, then use / to set.  
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those  
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) on page 39, you can customize your setup  
options below. You can calibrate your system differently  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
Channel Level  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
Channel Level  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
1
for up to six different MCACC presets , which are useful  
START  
START  
if you have different listening positions depending on the  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa,  
2
or playing a video game close to the TV).  
Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended),  
but you can limit the system calibration to only one  
Important  
4
setting (to save time) if you want. The available  
5
options are ALL, Keep SP System, Speaker  
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved  
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ  
Pro & S-Wave.  
during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
3
EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC  
Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines  
how the frequency balance is adjusted.  
• The screen saver will automatically appear after five  
minutes of inactivity.  
After a single calibration is performed, each of the  
following three correction curves can be stored  
CAUTION  
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)  
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left  
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude  
characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all  
the speakers are set individually so no special weighting  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
®
THX  
6
is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all  
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered  
in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings  
(no equalization is applied to the front left and right  
channels).  
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC  
THX Speaker (only available when the Auto MCACC  
Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES  
if you are using THX speakers (set all speakers to  
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.  
menu, then press ENTER  
.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to  
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu  
on page 71.  
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the  
Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In  
addition to measurements at the listening position,  
you can use two more reference points for which test  
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is  
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration  
1.Advanced MCACC  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
Channel Level  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
START  
7
for several seating positions in your listening area.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
Place the microphone at the reference point  
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone  
placement will be at your main listening position:  
Note  
1 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management on page 82.  
2 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.  
3 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).  
4 • The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional on page 77 for more on this.  
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For  
details, see Setting the Audio options on page 60.  
5 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 85) unchanged.  
6 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJ and FRONT  
ALIGN settings.  
7 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
6
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish  
2nd reference  
3rd reference  
outputting test tones.  
point  
point  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
it’s doing this.  
1
2
3
Main listening  
position  
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This  
may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient  
noise! or Check microphone) select RETRY after  
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40) and  
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to  
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
jack on the front panel.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the  
MCACC SETUP MIC jack.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
7
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in  
the GUI screen.2  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
VIDEO CAMERA  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the  
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,  
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this  
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in  
step 8.  
iPod  
iPhone  
MCACC SETUP MIC  
USB  
HDMI  
4
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Analyzing...  
2/10  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
10  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you  
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
:
:
:
OK  
Speaker YES/NO  
OK  
RETRY  
1
microphone.  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
4
When you’re finished setting the options, select  
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker  
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a  
problem with the speaker connection.  
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power  
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t  
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to  
select the speaker and / to change the setting  
and continue.  
START then press ENTER  
.
5
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
• Make sure the microphone is connected.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically  
detected every time you switch on the system. Make  
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 40 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring  
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker  
3
connections.  
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,  
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.  
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure  
again.  
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
Note  
1 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.  
2 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.  
3 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective  
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER  
.
Press RETURN after you have finished checking each  
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back  
to the HOME MENU.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker  
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver  
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Analyzing...  
Now Analyzing...  
5/10  
Manual MCACC setup  
Surround Analysis  
Speaker System  
Channel Level  
Speaker Distance  
Standing Wave  
Reverb  
Subwoofer Check  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
OK  
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup  
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more  
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,  
you should have already completed Automatically setting  
up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39.  
Aco Cal EQ Pro  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.  
You only need to make these settings once (unless you  
change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers).  
• If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup  
(in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the  
2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it  
at your main listening position.  
CAUTION  
• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are  
output at high volume.  
9
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and  
the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual  
Important  
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you  
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing  
HOME MENU (step 2 in Making receiver settings from  
the Advanced MCACC menu on page 71).  
1
SP Setup menu (starting on page 84).  
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting  
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check  
screen:  
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect  
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it  
about ear level at your normal listening position.  
Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU  
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If  
the microphone is connected while the HOME  
MENU is not being displayed, the display will change  
to the Full Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC.  
Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers  
you’ve connected (see page 85 for more on this)  
Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker  
system (see page 75 or 86 for more on this)  
Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers  
from the listening position (see page 75 or 87 for  
2
more on this)  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 40 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower  
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 76 for more on this)  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up  
the volume to the middle position.  
Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency  
balance of your speaker system based on the  
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 77  
for more on this)  
Output PC – The data transfer mode with the  
connected computer is set. The graphs of the reverb  
characteristics before and after calibration and the  
various MCACC parameters can be checked (see  
Output PC on page 81 for more on this).  
Note  
1 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size  
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 84.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking  
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend  
adjusting the settings manually.  
2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal  
surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced  
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual  
MCACC menu.  
MCACC setup menu.  
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC  
menu on page 71 if you’re not already at this screen.  
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.  
1c.Manual MCACC  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1.Advanced MCACC  
1c.Manual MCACC  
1. Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
CAUTION  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
1. Fine Channel Level  
Loud test tones will be output.  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
5. EQ Professional  
Please wait...**  
5. EQ Professional  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want  
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty  
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.  
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to  
make these settings in order.  
Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the  
overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine  
Channel Level below).  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
Reference Ch  
Ref.Ch Level  
:
:
L
0.0 dB  
Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for  
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance  
below).  
Exit  
Cancel  
Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low  
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing  
Wave on page 76).  
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/  
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the  
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust  
on page 77:  
–10.0 dB) as necessary.  
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you  
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds  
like both tones are the same volume, press to confirm  
and continue to the next channel.  
EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance  
of your speaker system while listening to test tones  
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 77).  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on  
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make  
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb  
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional on page 77).  
R <=>  
:
L
L
0.0 dB  
R
C
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
Exit  
Finish  
Fine Channel Level  
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
You can achieve better surround sound by properly  
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You  
can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB  
increments. The following setting can help you make  
detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the  
Manual speaker setup on page 84.  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use / to select it.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Fine Speaker Distance  
• Default setting: 3.00m (all speakers)  
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,  
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some  
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening  
position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of  
each speaker in 1 cm increments. The following setting  
can help you make detailed adjustments that you may  
not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 84.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC  
Standing Wave  
2
setup menu.  
• Default setting: ON /ATT 0.0dB (all filters)  
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain  
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system  
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the  
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative  
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower  
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your  
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,  
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The  
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of  
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During  
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used  
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC  
1c.Manual MCACC  
1c2.Fine SP Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Fine Channel Level  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
Reference Ch  
Ref.Ch Distance  
:
:
L
3.61m  
5. EQ Professional  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the  
listening position.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance  
as necessary.  
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected  
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in  
terms of speaker distance from 0.01m to 9.00m.  
3
presets.  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC  
setup menu.  
1c2.Fine SP Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c3.Standing Wave  
A/V RECEIVER  
R <=>  
:
L
Filter 1 Filter 2  
Filter 3  
Freq ATT Freq ATT Freq ATT TRIM  
1. Fine Channel Level  
Filter  
Q
Q
Q
L
3.61m  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
Channel  
[Hz] [dB] [Hz] [dB] [Hz]  
[dB] [dB]  
SW  
63 5.0 10 120 5.0 10 201 5.0 10 +10.0  
R
C
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.67m  
3.69m  
2.26m  
2.74m  
5.13m  
5.77m  
3.54m  
dB  
0
5. EQ Professional  
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
5
10  
16  
32  
63  
125  
250  
500  
1k Hz  
Exit  
Finish  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the  
target channel. From the listening position, face the two  
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each  
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are  
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of  
2
Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave  
Control.  
Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will  
apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel  
and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).  
1
you and between your arm span.  
TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is  
SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to  
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).  
Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where  
Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting  
and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the  
narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation  
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted  
frequency).  
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,  
press to confirm and continue to the next channel.  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use / to select it.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Note  
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.  
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be  
difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).  
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio  
options on page 60 for more on this.  
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.  
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.  
• When Standing Wave is selected for an MCACC preset memory where STAND.WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER,  
STAND.WAVE ON is automatically selected.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust  
Tip  
1
• Default setting: ON /0.0dB (all channels/bands)  
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too  
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker  
balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel  
levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use /  
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room  
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It  
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your  
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that  
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’  
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the  
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 72, you can also adjust these  
settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits  
your tastes.  
to select TRIM, then use / to raise or lower the  
channel level for the current speaker.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room  
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It  
can also provide you with a graphical output of the  
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
2
frequency response of your room.  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant  
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that  
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb  
characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the  
Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 72 to calibrate the room automatically. This should  
provide a balanced calibration that suits the  
5. EQ Professional  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your  
liking.  
characteristics of your listening room.  
1c4.EQ Adjust  
A/V RECEIVER  
dB  
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual  
Advanced EQ Setup (below) provides a more  
customized calibration of your system using the direct  
sound of the speakers. This is done with the help of a  
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or  
using a computer (with software available from Pioneer  
— see Output PC on page 81).  
Ch :  
L
0.0 -8.0 -6.0 0.0 +3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0 0.0 0.0  
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
63 125 250 500 1k 8k 16k TRIM  
2k  
4k  
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz]  
Exit  
Finish  
Use / to select the channel.  
How to interpret the graphical output  
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or  
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of  
the screen and press to return to Ch, then use / to  
select the channel.  
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in  
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line  
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a  
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when  
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually  
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this  
usually takes about 100 ms or so).  
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the  
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might  
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until  
OVER! disappears from the display.  
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how  
your room is responding to certain frequencies.  
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are  
taken into account automatically (compensation is  
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency  
measurements can be examined both with and without  
3
the equalization performed by this receiver.  
Note  
1 When EQ Adjust is selected for an MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ ON is automatically  
selected.  
2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a  
computer (with software available from Pioneer—see Output PC on page 81 for more on this).  
3 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most  
obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
channel frequencies/sounds.  
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
according to your room characteristics  
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at  
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing  
the time that is best for system calibration with your  
particular room characteristics.  
Front L  
Level  
Front R  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
calibration range  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
The graph below shows the difference between  
conventional acoustic calibration and professional  
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the  
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).  
Time  
0
80  
160  
(in msec)  
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often  
not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time  
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience  
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what  
works best for your particular room.  
Level  
Test tone  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
calibration range  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
Note that changing the room (for example, moving  
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.  
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.  
Time  
(in msec)  
0
80  
160  
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it  
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,  
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner  
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the  
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of  
30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will  
influence the sound of most rooms:  
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c5.EQ Professional  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Fine Channel Level  
a. Reverb Measurement  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
b. Reverb View  
c. Advanced EQ Setup  
5. EQ Professional  
Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –  
Depending on your room, you may find that lower  
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to  
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).  
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the  
measurement is done too late.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select an option and press ENTER.  
Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the  
reverb characteristics before and after calibration.  
(For graphical output using a PC, see Connecting a  
PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 34 to  
connect an RS-232C cable before selecting this  
option.)  
Low  
frequencies  
Level  
High  
frequencies  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
calibration range  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
Reverb View – You can check the reverb  
measurements made for specified frequency ranges  
in each channel. This can also be used to compare  
Time  
(in msec)  
1
0
80  
160  
the reverb characteristics before and after  
calibration.  
Reverb characteristics for different channels –  
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for  
each channel. Since this difference increases as the  
sound is influenced by the various room  
2
characteristics, it is often better to capture a  
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of  
Note  
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Reverb  
Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC  
function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics  
with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without  
controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to  
check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement  
function.  
2 The reverb characteristics after calibration can be displayed even after performing the Full Auto MCACC function (Automatically setting up  
for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39). In this case, the display shows the predicted reverb characteristics after calibration. If the  
measurements are taken using the Reverb Measurement command (page 79) with the equalizer on, the actually measured reverb  
characteristics after calibration are displayed.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time  
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and  
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of  
your listening area. Note that customizing system  
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you  
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic MCACC  
(Expert) on page 72 and is not necessary if you’re  
satisfied with these settings.  
The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full  
Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements  
3
are conducted.  
Use / to select the channel, frequency and  
calibration setting you want to check. Use / to go  
back and forth between the three. The reverb  
characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can  
be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After.  
4
Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate  
decibels in 2 dB steps.  
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ  
ON or OFF, and then START  
.
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the  
MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired  
1c5a.Reverb Measurement  
A/V RECEIVER  
time setting for calibration, and then select START  
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can  
choose the time period that will be used for the final  
.
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
EQ OFF  
Reverb Measure with :  
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you  
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is  
best to use the measurement results as a reference for  
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we  
recommend using the 30-50ms setting.  
START  
Exit  
Cancel  
The following options determine how the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in  
Reverb View and Output PC (see Connecting a PC for  
Advanced MCACC output on page 34):  
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC  
Time Position  
EQ Type  
:
:
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
30-50ms  
SYMMETRY  
NO  
MCACC  
Time Position  
EQ Type  
:
:
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
30-50ms  
SYMMETRY  
NO  
EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area without the equalization  
performed by this receiver (before calibration).  
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point  
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point  
START  
START  
EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
your listening area with the equalization performed  
1
by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ  
Use / to select the setting. Use / to switch  
between them.  
response may not appear entirely flat due to  
adjustments necessary for your listening area.  
2
Select the setting from the following time periods (in  
milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, 20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-  
60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied  
to all channels during calibration.  
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select  
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 96  
for troubleshooting information.  
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2  
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.  
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the  
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN  
when you’re done.  
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are  
given the option to check the settings on-screen.  
1c5b.Reverb View  
A/V RECEIVER  
Channel  
Frequency  
Calibration:  
dB  
:
:
Front  
63Hz  
After  
M1.MEMORY 1  
SYMMETRY  
16 kHz  
8 kHz  
4 kHz  
2 kHz  
1 kHz  
500 Hz  
250 Hz  
125 Hz  
63 Hz  
63.0  
61.0  
59.0  
57.0  
55.0  
53.0  
0
40  
80  
120  
160 ms  
Exit  
Return  
Note  
1 • The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset,  
exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU.  
• The predicted reverb characteristics after calibration can be acquired with the Full Auto MCACC function (Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39), but here the actually measured reverb characteristics after calibration can be acquired.  
2 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed  
by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.  
3 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC (ALL) function shows the graph for the  
inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.  
4 The reverb characteristics graph is overwritten each time the reverberations are measured. No Data is displayed if there is no reverb  
characteristic data, for example before measurements have been taken.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Checking MCACC Data  
10  
Speaker Setting  
Use this to display the speaker size and number of  
speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 85 for more on this.  
At the procedure of Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39, the procedure of  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72 or after fine-  
adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 74, you can  
check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen or, if  
a computer is connected, on the computer’s screen.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
2a.Speaker Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
:
:
:
:
:
LARGE  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL x 2  
YES  
RECEIVER  
, then press HOME MENU.  
SW  
1
Press  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select the channel you want to check.  
2
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the HOME  
Use / to select the channel. The corresponding  
channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.  
MENU  
.
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
2.MCACC Data Check  
A/V RECEIVER  
Channel Level  
Use this to display the level of the various channels. See  
Channel Level on page 86 for more on this.  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
a. Speaker Setting  
b. Channel Level  
c. Speaker Distance  
d. Standing Wave  
e. Acoustic Cal EQ  
f. Output PC  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2b.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
3
Select the setting you want to check.  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the  
speaker systems. See Speaker Setting below for more  
on this.  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the  
different speakers. See Channel Level below for more  
on this.  
Exit  
Return  
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select  
Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to  
the different speakers. See Speaker Distance below  
for more on this.  
the MCACC preset you want to check.  
The level of the various channels set at the selected  
MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels  
that are not connected.  
Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave  
control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 81  
for more on this.  
Speaker Distance  
Acoustic Cal EQ Used to check the calibration  
values of the listening environment’s frequency  
response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 81 for more on  
this.  
Use this to display the distance from the different  
channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance  
on page 87 for more on this.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data  
Output PC – See Output PC on page 81 for more on  
this.  
Check menu.  
2c.Speaker Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
4
Press RETURN to go back to MCACC Data Check  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.61m  
3.69m  
3.51m  
2.74m  
5.77m  
5.13m  
2.26m  
3.54m  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the HOME MENU.  
Exit  
Return  
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select  
the MCACC preset you want to check.  
The distance from the various channels set at the  
selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for  
channels that are not connected.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
Standing Wave  
Output PC  
Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment  
values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing  
Wave on page 76 for more on this.  
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 2  
in Checking MCACC Data on page 80. The data measured  
with the Advanced MCACC function is transmitted to the  
1
connected computer. The 3D graphs of the reverb  
characteristics before and after calibration and the  
MCACC results (parameters) can be checked.  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
2d.Standing Wave  
1
Select ‘Output PC’ from MCACC Data Check menu  
A/V RECEIVER  
Filter 1 Filter 2  
Filter 3  
ATT TRIM  
[dB] [dB]  
Filter  
Channel  
Freq ATT Freq ATT Freq  
Q
Q
Q
and press ENTER  
.
[Hz] [dB] [Hz] [dB] [Hz]  
SW  
63 5.0 10 120 5.0 10 201 5.0 10 +10.0  
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the  
MCACC application on your PC shows on the GUI  
screen.  
dB  
0
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
5
10  
16  
32  
63  
125  
250  
500  
1k Hz  
Exit  
Return  
2f.Output PC  
A/V RECEIVER  
2
When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use / to  
Start the MCACC application on your PC.  
select the channel for which you want to check  
standing wave control.  
The standing wave related calibration value for the  
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset  
and its graph are displayed.  
Exit  
Cancel  
2
Start the MCACC application on your computer.  
3
Press  
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to  
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It  
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to  
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on  
your computer. The various parameters and the reverb  
characteristics data used for display on the computer are  
not cleared when the power is turned off. If the reverb  
characteristics are re-measured, however, the data is  
select the MCACC preset you want to check.  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
Use this to display the calibration values for the  
frequency response of the various channels set in the  
different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Adjust on page 77 for more on this.  
2
overwritten.  
1
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
Check menu.  
You will return to the MCACC Data Check menu.  
Continue with other operations in the MCACC Data  
Check menu if necessary. Press RETURN again to exit  
the MCACC Data Check menu.  
2e.Acoustic Cal EQ  
A/V RECEIVER  
dB  
Ch :  
L
0.0 -8.0 -6.0 0.0 +3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0 0.0 0.0  
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
63 125 250 500 1k 8k 16k TRIM  
2k  
4k  
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz]  
Exit  
Finish  
2
When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use / to select the  
channel.  
The calibration value for the frequency response of the  
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset  
and its graph are displayed.  
3
Press  
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to  
select the MCACC preset you want to check.  
Note  
1 To transmit data, the receiver and computer must be connected using an RS-232C cable and a special application must be installed on the  
computer. See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 34 for more on this.  
2 Only one set of reverb characteristics is stored on the receiver. If you wish to compare several different measurement results, transmit the  
data to the computer each time reverb measurements are taken.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Data Management  
10  
Renaming MCACC presets  
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re  
using, you may want to rename them for easier  
identification.  
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,  
allowing you to calibrate your system for different  
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the  
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data  
1
same listening position). This is useful for alternate  
Management setup menu.  
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to  
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies  
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
3a.Memory Rename  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Memory Rename  
MCACC Position Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
:
:
:
:
:
:
MEMORY 1  
MEMORY 2  
MEMORY 3  
MEMORY 4  
MEMORY 5  
MEMORY 6  
From this menu you can copy from one preset to another,  
name presets for easier identification and clear any ones  
you don’t need.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
1
Press RECEIVER , then press HOME MENU.  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then  
select an appropriate preset name.  
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a  
preset name.  
2
Select ‘Data Management’ from the HOME MENU.  
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,  
then press RETURN when you’re finished.  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
1. Advanced MCACC  
a. Memory Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
Copying MCACC preset data  
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 74), we  
recommend copying your current settings to an unused  
2
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will  
give you a reference point from which to start.  
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for  
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets  
below).  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one  
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC  
preset data below).  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
3b.MCACC Memory Copy  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Memory Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
Copy  
From  
To  
:
:
:
All Data  
M1.MEMORY  
M1.MEMORY  
1
1
MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets  
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on  
page 83).  
OK  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
2
3
Select the setting you want to copy.  
All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected  
MCACC preset memory.  
Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and  
speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC  
preset memory.  
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the  
settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy  
them (‘To’).  
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
Note  
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72, either of  
which you should have already completed.  
2 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
4
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.  
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES.  
If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.  
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
Clearing MCACC presets  
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets  
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration  
settings of that preset.  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
3c.MCACC Memory Clear  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Memory Rename  
Clear  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
OK  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.  
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
3
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.  
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES.  
If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.  
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
11  
Chapter 11:  
The system and the other setup  
Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used  
for surround back terminals and the size, number  
distance and overall balance of the connected  
speakers (see Manual speaker setup below).  
Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu  
The following section describes how to change the  
speaker-related settings manually and make various  
other settings (input selection, OSD language selection,  
etc.).  
Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to  
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see  
The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language  
can be changed (see Changing the OSD display  
language (OSD Language) on page 38).  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
TV/DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect  
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup  
menu on page 88).  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
PTY  
SEARCH  
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
1
Manual speaker setup  
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.  
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to  
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need  
to make these settings once (unless you change the  
placement of your current speaker system or add new  
speakers).  
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,  
disconnect them.  
Press RECEIVER , then press HOME MENU.2  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
2
These settings are designed to customize your system,  
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) on page 39, it isn’t necessary to make all of  
these settings.  
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME  
MENU.  
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then  
press ENTER  
.
CAUTION  
• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
output at high volume.  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
above if you’re not already at this screen.  
Exit  
Return  
4.System Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
1. Surr Back System  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
6. THX Audio Setting  
4.System Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
Exit  
Return  
adjust these settings in order:  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.  
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when either the iPod/USB input function is selected or the headphones are connected. When you set ZONE  
2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 63), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
11  
Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your  
surround back speakers (see below).  
3
When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.  
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.  
Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
speakers you’ve connected (see below).  
Speaker Setting  
Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your  
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration  
speaker system (page 86).  
1
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency) . It is  
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) on page 39 are correct. Note that this setting  
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set  
independently.  
Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your  
speakers from the listening position (page 87).  
X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker  
system for movie soundtracks (page 87).  
THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are  
using a THX speaker setup (page 87).  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup  
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
menu.  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
4a2.Speaker Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
:
:
:
:
:
LARGE  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL x 2  
YES  
Surround back speaker setting  
• Default setting: Normal  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
SW  
6. THX Audio Setting  
X.OVER  
:
80Hz  
There are several ways you can use the surround back  
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a  
normal home theater setup where they are used for the  
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping  
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system  
in another room.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set,  
then select a speaker size.  
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the  
1
Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the Manual SP  
2
following speakers:  
Setup menu.  
Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you  
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send  
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 84 if you’re not already at this screen.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
4a1.Surr Back System  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
Normal  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker  
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center  
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to  
the front speakers).  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
:
:
:
:
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
6. THX Audio Setting  
SB  
OK  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the  
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a  
subwoofer).  
2
Select the surround back speaker setting.  
Normal – Select for normal home theater use with  
surround back speakers in your main (speaker  
system A) setup.  
Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in  
another room (see Switching the speaker system on  
page 63).  
Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-  
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your  
speakers on page 20).  
ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals for an independent system in  
another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on  
page 63).  
Note  
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.  
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center, surround and surround back  
speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
11  
SB – Select the number of surround back speakers  
you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or  
LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce  
bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or  
SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround back speakers choose NO.  
2
3
Select a setup option.  
1
MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from  
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel  
levels.  
AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves  
from speaker to speaker automatically.  
Confirm your selected setup option.  
SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels  
set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when  
YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want  
the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or  
you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that  
would normally come out the front and center  
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.  
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
CAUTION  
Loud test tones will be output.  
2
Please wait...**  
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did  
not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass  
frequencies are output from other speakers).  
Exit  
Cancel  
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.3  
4
Adjust the level of each channel using /.  
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.  
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown  
on-screen:  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
Channel Level  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the  
overall balance of your speaker system, an important  
factor when setting up a home theater system.  
Exit  
Finish  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is  
emitted.  
4
4a.Manual SP Setup  
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
Test Tone  
:
AUTO  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
6. THX Audio Setting  
Tip  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
• You can change the channel levels at any time by  
press RECEIVER , then press CH LEVEL, and then  
using / on the remote control.  
Note  
1 • If you selected Speaker B, ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 85) you can’t adjust the surround back  
settings.  
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.  
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.  
2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This  
may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in  
the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good  
results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears  
judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL  
for the front speakers.  
3 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds  
playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.  
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.  
4 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker  
to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).  
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
11  
2
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.  
Speaker Distance  
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed  
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at  
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope  
increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the  
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your  
room size:  
For good sound depth and separation from your system,  
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from  
the listening position. The receiver can then add the  
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP  
Setup menu.  
Room size (m2)  
36 48 60 72 300 1000  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
4a4.Speaker Distance  
X-Curve  
(dB/oct)  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0  
1. Surr Back System  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.61m  
3.69m  
3.67m  
2.74m  
5.77m  
5.13m  
2.26m  
3.54m  
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and  
the X-Curve has no effect.  
6. THX Audio Setting  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
THX Audio Setting  
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using /.  
When the THX Loudness Plus function is used, sound  
can be played with the full surround effect even when the  
volume is low.  
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01 m  
increments.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
For the most effective results when using the THX Select2  
Cinema, THX Select2 Music Mode and THX Select2  
Games Mode listening modes (see Using the Home THX  
modes on page 51) with the Advanced Speaker Array  
(ASA) system (see About THX on page 102), it is required  
that you make the setting. See Placing the speakers on  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Tip  
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround  
back speakers are the same distance from the  
listening position.  
2
page 17 for more on THX speaker placement.  
With some speaker setups, depending on the position of  
the subwoofer and the walls in your listening area, you  
may experience overly resonant frequencies in the bass.  
If you have this problem use the THX Select2 subwoofer  
setup to switch on BGC (boundary gain compensation)  
X-Curve  
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright  
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting  
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater  
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie  
3
(see About THX on page 102 for more on this).  
1
soundtracks.  
1
Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP  
setup menu.  
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
6. THX Audio Setting  
6. THX Audio Setting  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
Note  
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on  
page 51).  
2 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won’t be able to select this setting.  
3 • THX Select2 SW can only be selected when SW at Speaker Setting is set to YES or PLUS.  
• The BGC setting can only be selected when THX Select2 SW is set to YES.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
11  
2
Select either ON or OFF for THX Loudness Plus  
setting.  
The Other Setup menu  
The Other Setup menu is where you can make  
customized settings to reflect how you are using the  
receiver.  
4a6.THX Audio Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
Loudness Plus  
SB SP Position  
THX Select2 SW  
BGC  
:
:
:
:
ON  
1.2 m<  
YES  
OFF  
1
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
Exit  
Finish  
3
Specify the distance of your surround back speakers  
from each other.  
2
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU  
.
4a6.THX Audio Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
Loudness Plus  
:
:
:
:
ON  
1.2 m<  
YES  
SB SP Position  
THX Select2 SW  
BGC  
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
OFF  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
Exit  
Finish  
0–0.3 m – Surround back speakers within 30 cm  
apart (best for THX surround sound).  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
>0.3– 1.2 m – Surround back speakers between 30  
cm and 1.2 m apart.  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
1.2 m< – Surround back speakers more than 1.2 m  
apart (default).  
KURO LINK Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with  
your Pioneer component supporting KURO LINK (see  
KURO LINK Setup on page 58).  
4
Specify whether your subwoofer is THX Select2  
certified or not.  
4a6.THX Audio Setting  
Multi Ch In Setup Specifies the optional settings for  
A/V RECEIVER  
a multi-channel input (page 89)  
.
Loudness Plus  
SB SP Position  
THX Select2 SW  
BGC  
:
:
:
:
ON  
1.2 m<  
YES  
OFF  
ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies the volume setting  
for a MULTI-ZONE setup (page 89).  
Power ON Level Setup – Specifies the volume level  
set when the power is turned on (page 90).  
Exit  
Finish  
Volume Limit Setup – Limits the maximum volume  
(page 90).  
If your subwoofer isn’t THX Select2 certified, but you still  
want to switch boundary gain compensation on, select  
YES here, but the effect might not work properly.  
Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this receiver’s  
remote control mode (page 90).  
5
Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain  
Flicker Reduction – Adjusts the way the GUI screen  
looks (page 90).  
Compensation setting.  
4a6.THX Audio Setting  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
A/V RECEIVER  
Loudness Plus  
SB SP Position  
THX Select2 SW  
BGC  
:
ON  
1.2 m<  
YES  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
:
:
:
OFF  
Exit  
Finish  
6
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
11  
Multi Channel Input Setup  
ZONE Audio Setup  
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-  
channel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is  
selected as an input function, you can display the video  
images of other input functions. In the Multi Channel  
Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-  
channel input.  
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see Using the  
MULTI-ZONE controls on page 63), you may need to  
specify your volume setting.  
1
Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
4d.Other Setup  
4d3.ZONE Audio Setup  
1
Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
ZONE 2 Volume Level : Variable  
menu.  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
ZONE 3 Volume Level : Variable  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
2
Select the volume level setting of ZONE 2 and  
ZONE 3 1  
.
Exit  
Return  
Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a  
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is  
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be  
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.  
2
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.  
0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level  
originally recorded on the source.  
+10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level  
increased by 10 dB.  
Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully  
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX  
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that  
receiver’s volume controls.  
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
SW Input Gain  
Video Input  
:
:
0dB  
DVD  
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this  
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is  
quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to  
find the correct level.  
Exit  
Finish  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
3
Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.  
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input  
function, you can display the video images of other input  
functions. The video input can be selected from the  
following: DVD, TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO, OFF.  
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
SW Input Gain  
Video Input  
:
:
+10dB  
DVD  
Exit  
Finish  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Note  
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 85, you won’t be able to change the volume level.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
11  
Power ON Level Setup  
The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same  
level when the receiver’s power is turned on.  
Remote Control Mode Setup  
• Default setting: 1  
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent  
erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver  
are being used.  
1
Select ‘Power ON Level Setup’ from the Other  
1
Setup menu.  
1
Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the  
4d.Other Setup  
4d4.Power ON Level Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
Other Setup menu.  
Power ON Level  
: LAST  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4d6.Remote Control Mode Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Remote Control Mode  
:
1
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
OK  
2
Select the Power ON Level setting you want.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
LAST – When the power is turned on, the volume is  
set to the same level as when the power was last  
turned off.  
2
3
4
Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.  
Select “OK” to change the remote control mode.  
• “---” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set  
to minimum level.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to change the  
remote control’s setting.  
See Operating multiple receivers on page 67.  
–80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to be set  
when the power is turned, in steps of 0.5 dB.  
It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the  
value specified at Volume Limit Setup.  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
Flicker Reduction Setup  
• Default setting: 4  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel  
the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting.  
Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the  
GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.  
Volume Limit Setup  
Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The  
volume cannot be increased above the level set here,  
even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial  
on the front panel).  
1
Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other  
Setup menu.  
1
Select ‘Volume Limit Setup’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4d7.Flicker Reduction Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Flicker Reduction  
:
4
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
4d.Other Setup  
4d5.Volume Limit Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
Volume Limit  
:
OFF  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
2
3
Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.  
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
2
3
Select the Volume Limit setting you want.  
OFF – The maximum volume is not limited.  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
–20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum volume is  
limited to the value set here.  
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Note  
1 If you change this receiver’s setting, also change the setting on the remote control.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Chapter 12:  
Additional information  
Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation  
If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same  
direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and  
left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced  
properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards  
the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped.  
Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research Group  
has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be  
achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area  
30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position (between  
the surround speakers and the listening position).  
Speaker Setting Guide  
In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is  
important to accurately position the speakers and make  
their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to  
finely focus the multi-channel sound.  
The three major elements in positioning the speakers are  
distance, angle and orientation (the direction in which  
the speakers are pointing).  
Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be  
equal.  
However, the sense of sound positioning can differ  
according to the conditions in the room and the speakers  
being used. In smaller environments in particular (when  
the front speakers are close to the listening position),  
with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.  
We suggest you use this example of installation as  
reference when trying out different installation methods.  
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.  
Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally  
symmetrical.  
In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this  
environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is  
possible to automatically correct the speaker distance  
electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Auto MCACC  
Setup function (page 39).  
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer  
Placing the subwoofer between the center and front  
speakers makes even music sources sound more natural  
(If there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is  
placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound  
output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is  
no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is  
placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not  
cancel out the bass sound output from the other  
speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result  
in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could  
excessively amplify the bass sound.  
Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment  
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers  
are steady, and leave at least 10 cm from the surrounding  
walls. Position the speakers attentively so that the  
speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the  
listening position (center of the adjustments). (We  
recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the  
layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant  
from the listening position.  
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at  
an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This  
can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but  
depending on the shape of the room this could result in  
standing waves. However, even if standing waves are  
generated, their influence on the sound quality can be  
prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave  
control function (page 81).  
Tip  
• If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a  
circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance  
correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to  
make them equalize the distance artificially.  
Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height  
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.  
Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC  
Setup (auto sound field correction) function  
It is more effective to perform the Auto MCACC Setup  
(page 39) procedure once the adjustments described  
above have been completed.  
Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid-  
and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.  
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as  
the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it  
to the listening position.  
Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height  
of the ears.  
Tip  
• The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger  
than the distance actually measured with a tape  
measure, etc. This is because this distance is  
corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Position of center speaker and monitor  
Positional relationship between speakers  
and monitor  
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker,  
keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the  
screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs  
using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center  
speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point  
it towards the listening position.  
Position of front speakers and monitor  
The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible  
to the monitor.  
Installation on floor  
(Diagram as seen  
from the side)  
TV  
L
R
Monitor  
45° to 60°  
• If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install  
it away from the TV.  
• When installing the center speaker on top of the  
monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards  
the listening position.  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug  
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
Power  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.  
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.  
Power cannot be turned off.  
(ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON is  
• Set the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3, then press  
RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.  
displayed.)  
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of  
off or the PHASE CONTROL  
wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.  
indicator blinks.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized  
independent service company.  
During loud playback the  
• Turn down the volume.  
power suddenly switches off.  
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 74.  
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press  
STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE +/– to select D.SAFETY  
OFF, and then use PRESET +/– to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY OFFto deactivate this  
feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on,  
some features may be unavailable.  
The unit does not respond  
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.  
when the buttons are pressed.  
• Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer  
then the power automatically authorized independent service company for help.  
switches off. The ADVANCED  
MCACC blinks and the power  
does not turn on.  
The ADVANCED MCACC  
indicator flashes and power  
turns off.  
• There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning on the power after 1 minute. If  
the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a  
Pioneer authorized independent service company. (Other symptoms may appear when the power is  
turned on.)  
AMP OVERHEAT and the  
power indicator flash and the  
power turns off.  
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.  
• Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.  
The Receiver suddenly power • The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized  
off or the blue indicator at the independent service company.  
center of the receiver flashes.  
Display blinks 12V TRG ERR. • An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.  
No sound  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an  
input function is selected.  
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).  
• Make sure the correct input function is selected.  
No sound output from the front  
speakers.  
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.  
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is  
selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.  
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 14).  
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).  
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected;  
center speakers.  
select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 50).  
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).  
No sound from surround back • Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on  
speakers.  
page 85).  
• Make sure surround back channel processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel  
processing on page 53).  
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with  
surround back channel processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back  
speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 53).  
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back channel  
processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on  
page 50).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).  
If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker  
terminal.  
No sound from subwoofer.  
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.  
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.  
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of  
your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings  
to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on  
page 85).  
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options  
on page 60).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound from one speaker.  
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).  
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening  
mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 50).  
Sound is produced from  
analog components, but not  
from digital ones (DVD, LD,  
CD-ROM, etc.).  
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 55).  
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected  
to (see The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input function.  
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.  
output when Dolby Digital/DTS  
software is played back.  
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set  
to On.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
No sound when using the  
• If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the HOME MENU.  
HOME MENU.  
Other audio problems  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Broadcast stations cannot be For FM broadcasts  
selected automatically, or  
there is considerable noise in  
radio broadcasts.  
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).  
For AM broadcasts  
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).  
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor,  
etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.  
A multichannel DVD source  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog  
appears to be downmixed to 2 inputs on page 43).  
channels during playback.  
Noise is output when scanning • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital  
a DTS CD.  
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when  
scanning.  
When playing a DTS format LD • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 55).  
there is audible noise on the  
soundtrack.  
Can’t record audio.  
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an  
analog source.  
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.  
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting  
other audio components on page 28).  
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see  
Speaker Setting on page 85).  
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the  
correctly, but the playback  
sound is odd.  
receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the  
speakers on page 18).  
The PHASE CONTROL feature • If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is  
doesn’t seem to have an  
audible effect.  
set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or  
depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).  
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on  
page 87).  
Noise or hum can be heard  
even when there is no sound  
being input.  
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source  
are not causing interference.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
There seems to be a time lag • See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 to set up your system  
between the speakers and the again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).  
output of the subwoofer.  
The maximum volume  
• Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Limit Setup on page 90).  
available (shown in the front  
panel display) is lower than the  
+12dB maximum.  
Video  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No image is output when an  
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 27).  
input is selected.  
• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another component are  
connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 61), you must connect your TV  
to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video,  
HDMI or S-Video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
• Check the video output settings of the source component.  
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.  
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If  
adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 61) and/or the  
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video  
Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 61) OFF.  
Can’t record video.  
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.  
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video  
cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to  
this receiver.  
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the  
picture.  
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may  
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect  
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or  
composite), then start playback again.  
Video signals are not output  
• When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal  
from the component terminal. and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the  
monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following:  
– Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.  
– Set RES on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu to PURE (page 61).  
Settings  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The Auto MCACC Setup  
continually shows an error.  
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see  
also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40). If the noise level cannot be kept low  
enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 84).  
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)  
terminals.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the  
surround back channel.  
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:  
– The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.  
Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase may be  
displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.  
– If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that  
affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify  
the polarity.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
After using the Auto MCACC • There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.  
Setup, the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.  
is incorrect.  
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some  
cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 85, and use the ALL (Keep  
SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72 if this is a  
recurring problem.  
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker • Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative () terminals are  
Distance setting (page 75)  
matched up properly).  
properly.  
The display shows KEY LOCK ON • With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the  
when you try to make settings. key lock.  
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.  
erased.  
• Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before unplugging the  
power cord.  
The various system settings are • Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone out before unplugging.  
not stored.  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The EQ response displayed in • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto  
the graphical output following MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal  
calibration does not appear  
sound.  
entirely flat.  
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment  
needed.  
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.  
EQ adjustments made using  
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these  
the Manual MCACC setup on adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the  
page 74 do not appear to  
filters dedicated to overall system calibration.  
change the graphical output.  
Lower frequency response  
curves do not seem to have  
been calibrated for SMALL  
speakers.  
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers  
that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.  
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable  
sound is output for display.  
Display  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The display is dark or off.  
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
After making an adjustment  
the display goes off.  
You can’t get DIGITAL to  
display when using SIGNAL  
SEL.  
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The  
Input Setup menu on page 40).  
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input function.  
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not • These indicators does not light if playback is paused.  
light when playing Dolby/DTS  
software.  
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.  
When playing Dolby Digital or • Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.  
DTS sources, the receiver’s  
format indicators do not light.  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 55).  
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.  
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.  
When playing certain discs,  
none of the receiver’s format  
indicators light.  
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what  
audio tracks are recorded on the disc.  
When playing a disc with the • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 55).  
listening mode set to Auto  
Surround or ALC, 2 PL II or  
Neo:6 appear on the receiver.  
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is  
not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
During playback of a Surround • The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1  
EX or DTS-ES source on the compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 53), then switch  
Remedy  
SBch AUTO setting, EX or ES to the THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 50).  
does not appear, or the signal  
is not properly processed.  
During playback of DVD-Audio, • This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a  
the display shows PCM.  
malfunction.  
The power turns off  
• See the Power section (page 92).  
automatically and some  
indicator flashes, or some  
indicator flashes and the power  
does not turn on.  
Remote control  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Cannot be remote controlled. • Set a 5-digit preset code corresponding to the receiver to be operated in the remote control (see  
Operating multiple receivers on page 67).  
• Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control Mode Setup  
on page 90).  
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 8).  
• Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 8).  
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.  
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.  
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this  
unit’s sensor on page 33).  
Other components can’t be  
operated with the system  
remote.  
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.  
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.  
HDMI  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The HDMI indicator blinks  
• Check all the points below.  
continuously.  
No picture or sound.  
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-  
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-Video or composite video  
jacks.  
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver  
(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-Video or composite  
video jacks between source and receiver.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,  
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor  
or other setting for your component.  
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio  
output.  
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to  
THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog  
audio connection.  
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI™ Cable) to connect this  
receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.  
No picture.  
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 61).  
• Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal (in Switching the HDMI output  
on page 65).  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.  
ceases.  
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.  
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.  
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.  
Noisy or distorted picture.  
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the  
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may  
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect  
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or  
composite), then start playback again.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,  
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
HDCP ERROR shows in the  
display.  
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible  
with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-Video  
or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be  
displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.  
Amp-linked operation not  
possible using KURO LINK  
function.  
• Check the HDMI connections.  
• The cable may be damaged.  
• Select ON for the KURO LINK setting (see KURO LINK Setup on page 58).  
• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.  
• Set the TV side KURO LINK setting to ON.  
• Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1. Then turn  
on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.  
Important information regarding the HDMI connection  
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-  
equipped component you are connecting–check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).  
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the  
following configurations when connecting up.  
Configuration A  
Configuration B  
Use component video cables to connect the video output  
of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s  
component video input. The receiver can then convert the  
analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal  
for transmission to the display. For this configuration,  
use the most convenient connection (digital is  
recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the  
operating instructions for more on audio connections.  
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the  
display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most  
convenient connection (digital is recommended) for  
sending audio to the receiver. See the operating  
instructions for more on audio connections. Set the  
display volume to minimum when using this  
configuration.  
Note  
Note  
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can  
only receive HDMI video from the connected  
component.  
• The picture quality will change slightly during  
conversion.  
• Depending on the component, audio output may be  
limited to the number of channels available from the  
connected display unit (for example audio output is  
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio  
limitations).  
• If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to  
switch functions on both the receiver and your  
display unit.  
• Since the sound is muted on the display when using  
the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on  
the display every time you switch input functions.  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
USB interface  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
The folders/files stored on a  
The folders/files are currently stored in a region Store the folders/files in the FAT region.  
USB memory device are not other than the FAT (File Allocation Table) region.  
displayed.  
The number of levels in a folder is more than 8.  
Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to  
8 (page 45).  
There are more than 30 000 folders/files stored in Limit the maximum number of folders/files stored  
a USB memory device.  
in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page 45).  
The audio files are copyrighted.  
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory  
device cannot be played back (page 45).  
A USB memory device is not The USB memory device does not support the  
Try using a USB memory device compatible with  
the mass storage class specifications. Note that  
there are cases where even the audio files stored  
on a USB memory device compatible with the  
mass storage class specifications are not played  
back on this receiver (page 45).  
recognized.  
mass storage class specifications.  
Connect the USB memory device and switch on  
this receiver (page 36).  
A USB hub is currently being used.  
This receiver does not support a USB hub  
(page 45).  
This receiver recognizes the USB memory device Switch off and on again this receiver.  
as a fraud.  
A USB memory device is  
Some formats of a USB memory device, including Check whether the format of your USB memory  
connected and displayed, but FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS, cannot be played back on device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT  
the audio files stored on the this receiver.  
USB memory device cannot  
be played back.  
12, NTFS, and HFS formats cannot be played back  
on this receiver (page 45).  
The file format cannot be properly played back on See the list of file formats that can be played back  
this receiver.  
on this receiver (page 47).  
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the  
remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:  
• Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.  
• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds. The  
power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.)  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Surround sound formats  
12  
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds  
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,  
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for  
enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.  
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound  
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and  
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio  
technology for all high-definition programming and  
media. It combines the efficiency to meet future  
broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to  
realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming  
high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-  
channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts  
worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-  
generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible  
with all current A/V receivers.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See  
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs  
of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs  
in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate  
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate  
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps  
on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams  
for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby  
Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound  
originally intended by directors and producers.  
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding  
system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD  
and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six  
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range  
channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)  
channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;  
hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.  
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital  
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,  
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit  
rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog  
Normalization, attenuates programs based on the  
average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak  
level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve  
uniform playback level.  
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete  
channel output, interactive mixing and streaming  
capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-  
Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital  
connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.  
Dolby TrueHD  
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding  
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in  
the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing  
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,  
unlocking the true high-definition entertainment  
experience on high-definition optical discs in the next  
generation. When coupled with high-definition video,  
Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater  
experience with stunning sound and high-definition  
picture.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)  
is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a  
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/  
right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for  
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as  
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby  
Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using  
the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system  
extracts surround sound from sources as follows:  
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8  
full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz  
audio. It also features extensive metadata including  
dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.  
Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a  
single-cable digital connection is possible for high-  
definition audio and video.  
Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono  
surround) from any stereo source  
Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround) from any stereo source  
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their  
maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas  
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than  
eight audio channels.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound  
(stereo surround and surround back) from two  
channel or 5.1 (and 6.1) channel sources  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DTS  
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master  
audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners  
without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD  
Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates,  
facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps  
in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD  
format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These  
high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96  
kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating  
the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is  
an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound  
faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies.  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding  
system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,  
DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and  
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio  
channels, comprising five full range channels, including  
an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved  
through the use of a low compression rate, and high  
rates of transmittance during playback.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:  
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;  
6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 &  
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is  
a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD  
and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. ©  
1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a  
decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES  
Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with  
a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed  
into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are  
also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel  
decoder.  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a  
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
DTS Neo:6  
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound  
from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)  
and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel  
information already encoded into the source, as well as  
its own processing to determine channel localization  
(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver). Two  
modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS  
Neo:6 with two channel sources.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
About iPod  
DTS 96/24  
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital  
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio  
using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully  
backward compatible with all existing decoders. This  
means that DVD players can play this software using a  
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.  
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has  
been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has  
been certified by the developer to meet Apple  
performance standards.  
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory  
has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and  
has been certified by the developer to meet Apple  
performance standards.  
DTS-EXPRESS  
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology  
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer  
rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD  
DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting  
the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and  
memory audio contents.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or  
its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
THX Surround EX  
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development  
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film  
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been  
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called  
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the  
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,  
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel  
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the  
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the  
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home  
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the  
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be  
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.  
Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX  
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this  
new technology in the home.  
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during  
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital  
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the  
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may  
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the  
tastes of the individual listener.  
About THX  
The THX technologies are explained below. See  
www.thx.com for more detailed information.  
THX Cinema processing  
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by  
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your  
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your  
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.  
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called  
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres  
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then  
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not  
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX  
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate  
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,  
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,  
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added  
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).  
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)  
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed  
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal  
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater  
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround  
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and  
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together  
facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the  
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the  
Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up  
screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the  
speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.  
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2  
MUSIC and THX Select2 GAMES.  
Re-Equalization  
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and  
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because  
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie  
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization  
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in  
a small home environment.  
Timbre Matching  
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the  
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is  
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all  
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the  
side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information  
going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the  
tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This  
ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.  
Boundary Gain Compensation™  
Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener  
may experience an excessive bass effect. This feature compensates  
for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature  
is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX  
Select2™ specifications.  
Adaptive Decorrelation  
THX Music  
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create  
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre  
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround  
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and  
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest  
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive  
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and  
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This  
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—  
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.  
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be  
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround  
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital  
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.  
THX Games  
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX  
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing  
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game  
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately  
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360  
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives  
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.  
THX Select2 Plus  
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 Plus  
certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a  
rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a  
product feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee  
that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb  
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus requirements  
cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power  
amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other  
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
THX Loudness Plus Description  
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in  
THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified amplifiers. With  
THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the  
rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of  
turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound  
elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX  
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur  
when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient  
surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users  
to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume  
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in  
any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX  
Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus  
settings for each type of content.  
About Neural – THX Surround  
®
Neural-THX Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This  
ASA Description  
revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and  
discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully  
compatible with stereo from various content sources. Neural-THX  
Surround enables 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies  
and digital music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by  
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep ambience  
and subtle details of movies, music and games.  
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed  
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal  
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater  
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround  
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and  
Subwoofer), be sure to go to the THX Audio Set-up screen and choose  
the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing,  
which will re-optimize the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three  
modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2 Games.  
®
Neural-THX Digital Music™ is a new surround mode specifically  
designed to enhance the playback of compressed digital music content.  
It provides listeners with an expanded sound stage and clean surround  
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and  
Internet streams.  
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound  
format for TV sports broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet  
streaming as well as leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with  
this technology being used by sound designers during content  
creation, as well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX  
Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the original  
mix.  
THX Select2 Cinema  
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers  
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,  
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back  
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and  
directional surround sounds.  
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2  
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.  
For additional information, please visit www.neuralsurround.com.  
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio  
Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER Corporation hereby grants the user  
a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product  
under USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or  
trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural  
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and  
logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX  
Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital  
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that  
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select  
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema  
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.  
THX Select2 Music  
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Select2 Music mode  
should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the  
surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS,  
Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear  
soundstage.  
THX Select2 Games  
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX  
Select2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA  
processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0  
encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.  
This accurately places all game audio surround information,  
providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Select2 Games  
mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all  
points of the surround field.  
THX, the THX logo and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which  
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other  
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats  
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see  
Using Stream Direct on page 53) you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
Input signal format  
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
Auto Surround / ALC / DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
Stereo playback  
As above  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
SACD sources  
As above  
As above  
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
Stereo playback  
As above  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
SACD sources  
As above  
As above  
As above  
Multichannel signal formats  
Input signal format  
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)  
Auto Surround / ALC  
Dolby Digital EX  
PURE DIRECT / DIRECT  
Dolby Digital EX  
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)  
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)  
DTS-HD sources  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS+Neo:6  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Other 6.1/7.1 channel sources  
Other 5.1 channel sources  
As above  
Dolby Digital EX  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
As above  
a
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected  
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)  
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources  
As above  
As above  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Preset code list  
12  
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that there  
are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There are also  
cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.  
example:  
Category  
TV  
General  
Pioneer 10037  
Preset code  
Manufacturer  
TV  
Casio 10037  
Europa 10037  
Hitachi Fujian 10150  
Hoeher 10865  
General  
Cathay 10037  
Europhon 10037  
Evesham 11719  
Evolution 11756  
Exquisit 10037  
Pioneer 10037, 10166, 10679, 11247,  
CCE 10037  
Celebrity 10000  
Hornyphon 10037  
HP 11502  
11260, 11398  
A.R. Systems 10556, 10037  
Accent 10037  
Centurion 10037  
Cineral 10092, 10451  
Citizen 10060, 10092, 10180  
Clarion 10180  
Hugoson 10890, 11217  
Humax 12057  
Hypson 10556, 10037  
Hyundai 10865  
Ferguson 10037, 10625, 10053,  
12053  
Acer 11403  
Acoustic Solutions 11523  
ADL 11217  
Fidelity 10037, 10171  
Finlux 10556, 10037  
Firstline 10556, 10037  
Fisher 10000, 10047, 10054, 10154  
Flint 10037  
Clarivox 10037  
Iberia 10037  
ICE 10037  
Iiyama 10890, 11217  
Imperial 10037  
Indiana 10037  
Innowert 10865  
Inteq 10017  
Admiral 10093  
Clatronic 10037  
Aiko 10037, 10092  
Aim 10037  
Condor 10037  
Conia 11498, 11687  
Contec 10037, 10180  
Cosmel 10037  
Akai 10556, 10037, 10000, 10702,  
11675  
Formenti 10037  
Fortress 10093  
Akiba 10037  
Akito 10037  
Craig 10180  
Fraba 10037  
Crosley 10054, 10180  
Crown 10037, 10053, 10180, 10672  
Crown Mustang 10672  
CTX 11756  
Friac 10037  
Interbuy 10037  
Interfunk 10037  
Internal 10556  
Intervision 10037  
Irradio 10037  
Isukai 10037  
Akura 10037, 10171, 11498, 11687  
Alba 10037, 10587  
All-Tel 10865  
Fujimaro 10865  
Fujitsu 10683, 10809, 10853  
Fujitsu General 10683  
Funai 10171, 10180, 11394, 11817  
Futuretech 10180  
Allstar 10037  
Curtis Mathes 10047, 10051, 10054,  
10060, 10093, 10145, 10154,  
10166, 10451  
Amstrad 10037, 10000, 10171  
Amtron 10000, 10180  
Anam 10037, 10180, 10250  
Anam National 10037, 10650, 10250  
Anitech 10037  
ITS 10037  
ITV 10037  
Galaxi 10037  
CXC 10180  
Galaxis 10037  
D-Vision 10556, 10037  
Daewoo 10556, 10037, 10092,  
10154, 10178, 10451, 10623,  
10661, 10865, 11812  
Dansai 10037  
Gateway 11755  
JCB 10000  
GE 10047, 10051, 10093, 10178,  
10451, 11147  
JMB 10556  
Ansonic 10037  
Jubilee 10556  
AOC 10625, 11365  
Ardem 10037  
GEC 10037  
JVC 10650, 10053, 10054, 10093,  
10160, 10463, 10683, 10731,  
11253, 11428, 12118  
Genexxa 10037  
Arena 10037  
Dawa 10037  
Gericom 10865, 11217  
Gibralter 10017  
Aristona 10556, 10037  
Asberg 10037  
Daytron 10037, 10092, 10178  
Decca 10037  
Kaisui 10037  
Go Video 10060  
Atlantic 10037  
Kathrein 10556  
KEC 10060, 10180  
Kendo 10037  
Dell 11264, 11403  
Denon 10145  
GoldStar 10037, 10178  
Goodmans 10556, 10037, 10625,  
10000, 10661, 11645, 11687,  
11719, 12053  
Audiosonic 10037, 10865  
Audiovox 10092, 10180, 10451,  
10623  
Denver 10037, 10587  
Desmet 10037  
Kiton 10037  
Aumark 10060  
Kneissel 10556, 10037  
Kolin 11240, 11331, 11610  
Kolster 10037  
Konig 10037  
Diamant 10037  
Digatron 10037  
Digiline 10037  
Gradiente 10037, 10053  
Granada 10037, 10226  
Grandin 10556, 10037, 10865  
Grundig10556, 10037, 10587, 10672,  
12053, 12127  
AVP 10000  
Awa 10451  
Baird 10037  
Digimate 10890  
Dixi 10037  
Konka 10037  
Basic Line 10556, 10037  
Baur 10037  
Korpel 10037  
DMTech 12001  
Grunpy 10180  
Kosmos 10037  
KTV 10180  
Baysonic 10180  
Beaumark 10178  
Beko 10037  
Dream Vision 11704  
Dual 10037  
H & B 12001  
Haier 11748  
Dumont 10017  
L&S Electronic 10865  
Lecson 10037  
Hallmark 10178  
Bell & Howell 10017, 10154  
BenQ 11574  
Dux 10037  
Hannspree 11351, 12027  
Hanseatic 10556, 10037, 10625,  
10661  
Dynatron 10037  
Dynex 11463  
Lenco 10037, 10587  
Beon 10037  
Bestar 10037  
Leyco 10037  
LG 10556, 10037, 10017, 10178,  
10856, 11178, 11423, 11663, 11768  
Liesenk & Tter 10037  
Liesenkotter 10037  
Lifetec 10037, 10683  
Loewe 10037, 10633, 11884  
Logik 11217, 11687  
ECE 10037  
Hantarex 10037, 10865  
Hantor 10037  
Blue Sky 10556, 10037, 11314  
BPL 10037  
Elbe 10556, 10037  
Electroband 10000  
Electrohome 10463  
Element 11687  
ELG 10037  
Harman/Kardon 10054  
Harsper 10865  
Bradford 10180  
Brandt 10625  
Harvard 10180  
Brinkmann 10037  
Brionvega 10037  
Broksonic 10463  
Bush 10556, 10037, 10587, 10661,  
11645, 11687, 12053  
Byd:sign 11309  
Harwood 10037  
Elin 10037  
Elite 10037  
Hauppauge 10037  
Havermy 10093  
Lumatron 10037  
Lux May 10037  
Emerson 10037, 10017, 10047,  
10154, 10178, 10180, 10236,  
10463, 10623  
HCM 10037  
LXI 10047, 10054, 10154, 10156  
Highline 10037  
M Electronic 10037, 10661  
Madison 10037  
Hinari 10037  
Carena 10037  
Carrefour 10037  
Carver 10054  
Envision 11365  
Erres 10037  
Hisense 10556, 11314, 12098  
Hitachi 10037, 10000, 10047, 10051,  
10054, 10145, 10150, 10178,  
11484, 11576, 11691  
MAG 11498, 11687  
ESC 10037  
Magnadyne 10054  
Cascade 10037  
Euroman 10037  
Magnavox 10054, 11454, 11866  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Magnum 10037  
Plantron 10037  
Soundwave 10037  
Squareview 10171  
SSS 10180  
World-of-Vision 10865, 10890,  
Manesth 10037  
Playsonic 10037  
Polaroid 11498, 11523, 11645,  
11687, 11766  
11217  
Manhattan 10037  
Xenius 10661  
Xoro 11217  
Xrypton 10037  
Marantz 10556, 10037, 10054,  
10704, 11398  
Standard 10037  
Portland 10092  
Powerpoint 10037  
Prism 10051  
Starlite 10037, 10180  
Strato 10037  
Mark 10037  
Yamaha 11576  
Yamishi 10037  
Yapshe 10250  
Yokan 10037  
Yoko 10037  
Matsui 10556, 10037  
Maxent 11755  
Sunkai 10865  
Profitronic 10037  
Proline 10037, 10625  
Proscan 10047  
Sunstar 10037  
Mediator 10556, 10037  
Medion 10556, 10037, 12001  
Megatron 10145, 10178  
Memorex 10037, 10060, 10150,  
Sunstech 12001  
Sunwood 10037  
Prosco 10156  
Prosonic 10037  
SuperTech 10556, 10037  
Supreme 10000  
Zenith 10017, 10463  
10154, 10178, 10180, 10250, 10463 Protec 10037  
Mercury 10037  
Metronic 10625  
SVA 10587, 10865  
Swisstec 10865  
Protech 10037  
Proton 10178  
Plasma television  
Sylvania 10054, 10171, 11394, 11864  
Symphonic 10171, 10180  
Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331  
Sysline 10037  
Pioneer 10166, 10679, 11247, 11260,  
Metz 10037, 10587  
MGA 10150, 10178  
Micromaxx 10037, 12001  
Midland 10017, 10047, 10051  
Minato 10037  
ProVision 10556, 10037  
Pulsar 10017  
11398, 11633, 14002, 14003, 14004  
Pvision 12001  
Akai 11675  
All-Tel 10865  
Pye 10556, 10037  
Tandy 10093  
Quadral 10051  
Quasar 10051, 10250, 10865  
Quelle 10037  
Tatung 10037, 11719, 11756  
TCM 12001  
CTX 11756  
Minoka 10037  
Mirai 11852, 12072  
Mitsubishi 10556, 10037, 10093,  
10150, 10160, 10178  
Morgan's 10037  
Daewoo 10661, 10865  
Dell 11264  
Dream Vision 11704  
Teac 10037, 10171, 10178  
Tec 10037  
R-Line 10037  
Tech Line 10037  
Radiola 10556, 10037  
Radiomarelli 10037  
RadioShack 10037, 10047, 10154,  
10178, 10180  
Technics 10556, 10650, 10051, 10250  
TechniSat 10556  
Evolution 11756  
Motorola 10093  
MTC 10060, 10092  
Multitec 10037  
Multitech 10037, 10180  
Mx Onda 11498, 11687  
Myryad 10556  
Fujimaro 10865  
Fujitsu 10683, 10809, 10853  
Fujitsu General 10683  
Technosonic 10556, 10625  
Techwood 10051  
Radiotone 10037  
RCA 10625, 10047, 10051, 10090,  
10093, 11147, 11247, 11781  
Realistic 10154, 10180  
Recor 10037  
Tecnimagen 10556  
Teknika 10054, 10060, 10092, 10180 Gateway 11755  
Telecor 10037  
Gericom 10865  
Grandin 10865  
NAD 10037, 10865  
Naiko 10037  
Telefunken 10037, 10625, 10702  
Telefusion 10037  
Rectiligne 10037  
Hantarex 10865  
Harsper 10865  
Nakimura 10037  
NAT 10226  
Telegazi 10037  
Redstar 10037  
Telemeister 10037  
Telesonic 10037  
Reflex 10037  
Hitachi 11484, 11576  
Hoeher 10865  
National 10226  
Relisys 10865, 11211, 11645  
Remotec 10037, 10093, 10145,  
10171, 10250  
NEC 10053, 10704, 11704, 11797  
Neckermann 10556, 10037  
NEI 10037  
Telestar 10556, 10037  
Teletech 10037  
Hyundai 10865  
Innowert 10865  
Teleview 10037  
Revox 10037  
Neovia 10865, 11710  
Netsat 10037  
Tennessee 10037  
JVC 10053, 10731  
RFT 10037  
Tensai 10037  
Roadstar 10037  
L&S Electronic 10865  
LG 10037, 10178, 11423, 11663  
Neufunk 10556, 10037  
New Tech 10556, 10037  
Nikkai 10037  
Tevion 10556, 10037, 11498, 11645,  
11687  
Runco 10017  
Saba 10625  
Thomson 10037, 10625, 11447  
Thorn 10037  
Magnavox 11866  
Marantz 11398  
Maxent 11755  
Saivod 10037  
Nikko 10178  
Norcent 11365  
Sampo 11755  
TMK 10178  
Tokai 10037  
Samsung 10556, 10037, 10587,  
10060, 10090, 10178, 10702,  
10766, 10812, 10814, 11060,  
11235, 11619, 12051  
Sansui 10037, 10463  
Sanyo 10037, 10000, 10047, 10154,  
10704  
Nordmende 10037, 12129  
Normerel 10037  
Novatronic 10037  
NTC 10092  
NEC 10704, 11704  
Neovia 10865  
Toshiba 10650, 10060, 10154, 10156,  
11156, 11256, 11524, 11656  
TRANS-continents 10556, 10037,  
10865  
Panasonic 11480, 10650, 10250,  
10853, 11636, 11650  
Philips 10556, 10605, 10690, 11756  
Okano 10037  
Transonic 10037, 10587  
Trio 11498, 11687  
Triumph 10556, 10037  
TVTEXT 95 10556  
Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610  
Onida 10053, 11253  
Onwa 10180  
Quasar 10865  
Sanyong 10037  
SBR 10556, 10037  
Schneider 10556, 10037  
Scotch 10178  
Relisys 10865  
Opera 10037  
Optimus 10650, 10166, 10250  
Orbit 10037  
Uher 10037  
Sampo 11755  
Samsung 10812, 11619  
Sanyo 10704  
Ultravox 10037  
Unic Line 10037  
United 10037, 10587  
Universal 10037  
Universum 10037  
Univox 10037  
Sears 10047, 10054, 10154, 10156,  
10171, 10178  
Orion 10556, 10037, 10236, 10463,  
12001  
Sliding 10865  
Soemtron 10865  
Sony 11651  
SEG 10037  
SEI 10037  
Orline 10037  
Osaki 10556, 10037  
Osio 10037  
Sei-Sinudyne 10037  
Semivox 10180  
Sunkai 10865  
SVA 10865  
Osume 10037  
Semp 10156  
V2max 10865  
Otic 11498, 11687  
Otto Versand 10556, 10037, 10226,  
10093  
Sylvania 11394  
Serino 10093  
V7 Videoseven 11217, 11755  
Vestel 10037  
Sharp 10053, 10093, 10818, 11093,  
11393  
Tatung 11756  
Tevion 11645  
Thomson 10625  
Toshiba 10650  
Vexa 10037  
Pacific 10556  
Shintoshi 10037  
Shivaki 10037  
Victor 10053, 10160, 10250, 11428  
VideoSystem 10037  
Vidikron 10054, 11398, 11633  
Vidtech 10178  
Packard Bell 11314  
Palladium 10556, 10037  
Palsonic 10037  
Siemens 10037, 10145  
Siera 10556, 10037  
Silva 10037  
Universal 10037  
Panama 10037  
Viewsonic 11755  
Vision 10037  
V2max 10865  
V7 Videoseven 11755  
Viewsonic 11755  
Panasonic 11480, 10037, 10650,  
10226, 10051, 10054, 10156,  
10236, 10250, 10853, 11271,  
11310, 11636, 11650  
Panavision 10037  
Silva Schneider 10037  
Silvano 10587  
Vizio 11758  
Singer 10037  
Vortec 10037  
Xenius 10661  
Yamaha 11576  
Zenith 10017  
Sinudyne 10037  
SKY 10037  
Voxson 10037  
Waltham 10037  
Penney 10047, 10051, 10060, 10156,  
10178  
Sliding 10865  
Wards 10000, 10017, 10047, 10051,  
10054, 10060, 10154, 10156,  
10166, 10178, 10180, 11147  
Watson 10037  
Soemtron 10865  
Solar Drape 10000  
Solavox 10037  
Perdio 10037  
LCD  
Perfekt 10037  
Acoustic Solutions 11523  
ADL 11217  
Petters 10037  
Soniko 10037  
Wega 10037  
Philco 10037, 10054, 10145, 11661  
Philips 10556, 10037, 10000, 10017,  
10054, 10605, 10690, 11254,  
11454, 11506, 11756  
Phoenix 10037  
Sonneclair 10037  
Sonoko 10037  
Westinghouse 10885, 10889, 10890  
Wharfedale 10556, 10037  
White Westinghouse 10037, 10623  
Wilson 10556  
Akai 11675  
AOC 10625  
Sontec 10037  
Sony 10810, 10037, 10000, 10053,  
10150, 10154, 11651, 11685  
Soundesign 10178, 10180  
BenQ 11574  
Blue Sky 11314  
Bush 11645, 11687  
Windy Sam 10556  
Phonola 10556, 10037  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Byd:sign 11309  
Nordmende 12129  
Loewe 11884  
HDTV  
Daewoo 10661  
Dell 11264  
Digatron 10037  
Digimate 10890  
Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610  
Orion 12001  
Pioneer 10679  
TV/VCR Combination  
Amstrad 10171  
Rear Projection TV  
Packard Bell 11314  
Panasonic 11480, 10650, 11636,  
11650  
Philips 10556, 10605, 11506  
Polaroid 11498, 11523, 11645,  
11687, 11766  
Broksonic 10463  
Curtis Mathes 10051  
Emerson 10463  
Panasonic 11271  
Philips 10037  
Pye 10037  
Element 11687  
Envision 11365  
Evesham 11719  
Sony 11651  
Ferguson 10625  
Fidelity 10171  
Funai 11394, 11817  
Thomson 10625  
Toshiba 11524, 11656  
Relisys 11211, 11645  
Gericom 10865, 11217  
Goodmans 11645, 11687, 11719  
Grandin 10865  
GE 10047, 10051, 10093  
GoldStar 10037  
Grundig 10556, 10037  
Samsung 10766, 10812, 10814,  
11235, 11619, 12051  
Sharp 10818, 11093, 11393  
Sliding 10865  
TV/DVD Combination  
Grundig 12127  
Akai 11675  
Alba 10587  
LG 10178  
Haier 11748  
Sony 10810, 11651, 11685  
Sunkai 10865  
Hannspree 11351, 12027  
Hisense 11314, 12098  
Hitachi 11484, 11576  
Hoeher 10865  
Bush 10587  
Magnavox 10054  
Memorex 10250  
SVA 10587, 10865  
Daewoo 11812  
Denver 10587  
DMTech 12001  
Mitsubishi 10556, 10093  
Swisstec 10865  
Sylvania 11864  
Orion 10463  
Hugoson 10890, 11217  
Humax 12057  
Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331  
Goodmans 11687  
Grundig 12127  
Panasonic 10051, 10250  
Penney 10051  
Philips 10556, 10037  
Tatung 11719  
TCM 12001  
Iiyama 10890, 11217  
H & B 12001  
JVC 10053, 11428, 12118  
Kolin 11240, 11331, 11610  
Technosonic 10625  
Thomson 10625  
Toshiba 11524  
Quasar 10051, 10250  
Lenco 10587  
Logik 11687  
Radiola 10556  
RCA 10047, 10051, 10093  
LG 10037, 10178, 11423, 11663,  
11768  
Loewe 11884  
Logik 11217  
TRANS-continents 10865  
Philips 10556, 11454  
Polaroid 11523, 11766  
Pvision 12001  
V7 Videoseven 11217  
Victor 11428  
Vidikron 11398  
Vizio 11758  
Saba 10625  
Sansui 10463  
Schneider 10556, 10037  
Sharp 10093  
Sunstech 12001  
Sylvania 11864  
Magnavox 11866  
Medion 12001  
Micromaxx 12001  
Mirai 11852, 12072  
Siemens 10037  
Sony 10000  
Westinghouse 10885, 10889, 10890  
World-of-Vision 10865, 10890,  
11217  
Thomson 10625  
Sylvania 10054  
United 10587  
NAD 10865  
NEC 11797  
Neovia 10865, 11710  
Norcent 11365  
Teac 10171  
Technics 10556  
Thomson 10625  
Xoro 11217  
TV/PVR Combination  
Hitachi 11691  
DVR/VCR  
Cathay 20278  
Fujitsu 20037, 20000  
Karcher 20081, 20278, 20642  
KEC 20278, 20037  
Kendo 20278, 20037, 20348, 20642  
Kenwood 20067, 20038  
Kneissel 20278, 20037, 20348  
Kodak 20037, 20035  
General  
CCE 20278  
Fujitsu Siemens 21972  
Funai 20278, 20000, 21593  
Pioneer 20081, 20067, 20042, 20058,  
Centrum 21593  
CGE 20000  
Cineral 20278  
20162, 22306, 22465, 22466, 22467  
Galaxi 20000  
A-Mark 20278  
Galaxis 20278  
Garrard 20000  
GE 20035, 20060  
GEC 20081  
Adventura 20000  
Citizen 20278, 20037  
Clatronic 20000, 21593  
Condor 20278  
AEG 21593  
Lenco 20278  
LG 20278, 20037, 20000, 20225  
Lifetec 20348  
Aiko 20278  
Aiwa 20037, 20348, 20000, 20032  
Akai 20348  
Craig 20037  
Crosley 20081  
General Technic 20348  
GoldStar 20037, 20000, 20038, 20225 Lloyd's 20000  
Alba 20081, 20278, 20348, 20000  
Allstar 20081  
Crown 20278, 20037  
Curtis Mathes 20035, 20162  
Cyrus 20081  
Goodmans 20081, 20278, 20037,  
20348, 20000, 20642  
Loewe 20081, 21562, 20037, 20162,  
21062, 21162  
Luxor 20043  
LXI 20037  
America Action 20278  
American High 20035  
Amstrad 20278, 20000  
Anam 20278, 20037, 20226, 20162  
Anam National 20226, 20162, 21162  
Ansonic 20000  
GPX 20037  
Daewoo 20278, 20642, 20045  
Dansai 20278  
Daytron 20278  
De Graaf 20081, 20042  
Decca 20081, 20000, 20067  
Degraff 20081, 20042  
Deitron 20278  
Denon 20081, 20042  
Diamant 20037  
Dual 20081, 20278, 20348, 20000  
Dumont 20081, 20000  
Durabrand 20642, 21593  
Gradiente 20000  
Granada 20081, 20037, 20000,  
20042, 20226, 20035  
M Electronic 20037, 20000, 20038  
Magnadyne 20081  
Magnasonic 20278  
Magnavox 20081, 20000, 20035,  
20039, 21593  
Grandin 20278, 20037, 20000  
Grundig 20081, 20348, 20320, 20226  
Aristona 20081  
Hanseatic 20081, 20037, 20038  
Harley Davidson 20000  
Harman/Kardon 20038  
Hewlett Packard 21972  
Hinari 20278  
ASA 20081, 20037  
Magnum 20642  
Astra 20035  
Manesth 20081, 20045  
Marantz 20081, 20035, 20038  
Mark 20278, 20000  
Marta 20037  
Asuka 20081, 20037, 20000, 20038  
Audiolab 20081  
Audiosonic 20278  
Audiovox 20037  
Hischito 20045  
Hitachi 20081, 20037, 20000, 20042  
Hoeher 20278, 20642  
Mascom 20642  
AVP 20000  
Elbe 20278, 20038  
Electrophonic 20037  
Elta 20278  
Mastec 20642  
Awa 20037, 20320, 20043  
Hornyphon 20081  
Master's 20278  
Baird 20278, 20000  
Hughes Network Systems 20042  
Hypson 20278, 20037, 20000  
Matsui 20037, 20348  
Mediator 20081  
Basic Line 20278  
Emerex 20032  
Bestar 20278  
Emerson 20278, 20037, 20000,  
20045, 20043, 20039  
ESC 20278  
Medion 20348, 20642  
MEI 20035  
Imperial 20000  
Black Diamond 20642  
Black Panther 20278  
Blaupunkt 20081, 20226, 20162  
Blue Sky 20278, 20037, 20348, 20642  
Brandt 20320  
Interbuy 20037  
Memorex 20037, 20348, 20000,  
20035, 20039, 20162, 21162  
Metronic 20081  
Interfunk 20081  
EuroLine 21593  
Internal 20278  
Ferguson 20278, 20348, 20000,  
20320, 20084  
Fidelity 20000  
International 20278, 20037, 20642  
Intervision 20278, 20037, 20348,  
20000  
Metz 20081, 21562, 20037, 20226,  
20162, 21062, 21162  
MGA 20043  
Brinkmann 20348  
Bush 20081, 20278, 20348, 20000,  
20642  
Finlandia 20081, 20037, 20000,  
20043, 20042, 20226  
Finlux 20081, 20000, 20042  
Firstline 20278, 20037, 20348, 20045,  
20043, 20042  
Irradio 20081, 20037  
ITV 20278, 20037  
Micormay 20348  
Calix 20037  
Microsoft 21972  
JBL 20278  
Canon 20035  
Carena 20081  
Carrefour 20045  
Carver 20081  
Casio 20000  
Migros 20000  
JMB 20348  
Minolta 20042  
Joyce 20000  
JVC 20067, 20084  
Mitsubishi 20081, 20642, 20067,  
20043  
Flint 20348  
Fuji 20033, 20035  
Motorola 20035  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
MTC 20000  
Profitronic 20081  
Shivaki 20037  
Tisonic 20278  
Multitec 20037  
Multitech 20000  
Murphy 20000  
Myryad 20081  
Proline 20278, 20000, 20642, 20320  
Proscan 20060  
Siemens 20081, 20037, 20320  
Siera 20081  
Tivo 20618  
Tokai 20037  
Topline 20348  
Toshiba 20081, 20000, 20045, 20043  
Totevision 20037  
Tradex 20081  
Prosco 20278  
Silva 20037  
Prosonic 20278  
Protech 20081  
Silver 20278  
SilverCrest 20642  
Singer 20045  
Naiko 20348, 20642  
NAP 20039  
National 20226  
Nebula Electronics 20033  
NEC 20037, 20067, 20038  
Neckermann 20081  
Nesco 20000  
Nikkai 20278  
Nikko 20037  
Nokia 20081, 20278, 20042  
Nordmende 20642, 20320, 20067  
ProVision 20278  
Pulsar 20039  
Sinudyne 20081  
Ultravox 20278  
Pye 20081  
Smaragd 20348  
United 20348, 21593  
Universum 20081, 20037, 20348,  
20000  
Sontec 20278, 20037  
Sony 20000, 20067, 20032, 20226,  
20033, 20035, 20636  
Soundwave 20037, 20348  
Standard 20278  
Quasar 20278, 20035, 20162, 21162  
Quelle 20081  
Radialva 20081, 20037  
Radiola 20081  
Vector 20045  
Vector Research 20038  
VIA Technologies 21972  
Victor 20067  
Radionette 20037  
RadioShack 20037, 20000  
Radix 20037  
Stern 20278  
STS 20042  
Video Concepts 20045  
Video Technic 20000  
Videomagic 20037  
Villain 20000  
Sunkai 20278, 20348  
Sunstar 20000  
Oceanic 20081, 20000, 20320  
Okano 20278, 20348  
Olympus 20226, 20035  
Onimax 20642  
Randex 20037  
RCA 20320, 20042, 20035, 20060  
Realistic 20037, 20000, 20035  
Reoc 20348  
Suntronic 20000  
Supra 20037  
Susumu 20037  
Wards 20081, 20000, 20045, 20042,  
20033, 20035, 20038, 20039, 20058,  
20060  
Watson 20081, 20642  
Weltblick 20037  
White Westinghouse 20278  
World 20348  
Onkyo 20222  
Ricavision 21972  
Sylvania 20081, 20000, 20043, 20035  
Symphonic 20000, 21593  
Optimus 20058, 20162, 21062, 21162 Roadstar 20081, 20278, 20037,  
Orion 20348  
20038  
Runco 20039  
T+A 20162  
Orson 20000  
Tandberg 20278  
Osaki 20037, 20000  
Otto Versand 20081  
Saba 20278, 20320  
Saisho 20348  
Tandy 20000  
Tashiko 20081, 20037, 20000  
Tatung 20081, 20348, 20000, 20067,  
20043  
Pacific 20348, 20000, 20642  
Packard Bell 21972  
Salora 20043  
XR-1000 20000, 20035  
Samsung 20045, 20060  
Sanky 20039  
Yamaha 20038  
Yamishi 20278  
Yoko 20037  
Palladium 20037, 20348  
Palsonic 20000  
Tchibo 20348  
TCM 20348  
Sansui 20000, 20067  
Sanyo 20067  
Panama 20035  
Teac 20037, 20000, 20642  
Technics 20081, 20000, 20226,  
20035, 20162, 21162  
TechniSat 20348  
Panasonic 21562, 20000, 20226,  
Saville 20278  
Zenith 20000, 20033, 20039  
ZX 20348  
20035, 20162, 20225, 20616, 21062, SBR 20081  
21162, 21244, 21293  
Pathe Cinema 20043  
Penney 20037, 20042, 20035, 20038  
Pentax 20042  
Schaub Lorenz 20348, 20000  
Schneider 20081, 20278, 20037,  
20348, 20000, 20642, 20042  
Scott 20043  
Teknika 20037, 20000, 20035  
Telefunken 20278, 20320  
Telerent 20226  
PVR  
Pioneer 22306, 22465, 22466, 22467  
Perdio 20000  
Sears 20037, 20000, 20042, 20035  
Seaway 20278  
Teletech 20278, 20000  
Tensai 20278, 20037, 20000  
Tevion 20348, 20642  
Texet 20278  
Microsoft 21972  
Philco 20035, 20038  
Philips 20081, 20035, 20618  
Phoenix 20278  
Panasonic 20616  
Philips 20618  
SEG 20081, 20278, 20642  
SEI 20081  
Phonola 20081  
Sei-Sinudyne 20081  
Seleco 20037  
Thomas 20000  
VCR/PVR Combination  
Pilot 20037  
Thomson 20278, 20320, 20067,  
20060  
JVC 20067  
Portland 20278  
Semp 20045  
Precision 20058  
Sentra 20278  
Thorn 20037, 20320, 20084  
Prinz 20000  
Sharp 20807  
DVD  
Atacom 31224  
Audiosonic 30690  
Audix 30713  
Clatronic 30672, 30675, 30788,  
31233  
Digix Media 30826  
DiK 30831  
General  
Pioneer 30571, 30525, 30142, 30631,  
Clayton 30713  
Dinamic 30788  
30632, 31460, 31571, 32442  
Autovox 30713  
Auvio 30843  
Coby 30730, 30778, 30852, 31351  
Codex 31233  
Disney 30831, 31270  
DK Digital 30831, 32095  
DMTech 30783  
Dragon 30831  
DreamX 31151  
Dual 30730, 30831, 30651, 30790,  
30665, 30713, 30779, 30783, 31023,  
31530  
Durabrand 30831, 30675, 30713,  
31023, 31502, 31530  
3D LAB 30539  
4Kus 31158  
Axion 30730  
Commax 31321, 31338  
Compacks 30826, 31107  
Conia 30852  
A-Trend 30714  
Basic Line 30713  
Acoustic Solutions 30730, 30713,  
31228  
Baze 30898  
Contel 30788  
BBK 31224, 31338, 32168  
Bellagio 31004  
Continental Edison 30831, 30872  
Crown 30770, 30690, 30713, 31115  
Crypto 31228  
AEG 30770, 30790, 30675, 30788,  
31233  
Bellwood 30826  
AFK 31051, 31152  
Belson 31086  
Cybercom 30831  
AG Electronics 31228  
Aim 30778  
Black Diamond 30713  
Blu:sens 31233, 31321  
Blue Nova International 31321  
Blue Sky 30695, 30651, 30790,  
CyberHome 30714, 30816, 30874,  
31023, 31502  
E:max 31233, 31321  
eBench 31152  
Airis 30672, 30826, 31005, 31107,  
31224, 31321, 31338  
Aiwa 30533, 30641  
Akai 30790, 30788, 30898, 30899,  
31115, 31233  
Cytron 30651, 31347, 31423  
ECC 30730  
30672, 30713, 30778, 30843, 31423 D-Vision 31115, 31367  
Boghe 31004  
Eclipse 30723, 30751  
Electrohome 32116  
Daenyx 30872  
Boman 30783, 30898, 31005  
Brainwave 30770, 31115  
Brandt 30503, 30551, 30651  
Broksonic 30695  
Daewoo 30770, 30714, 30872, 31483 Elfunk 30713, 30850  
AKI 31005  
Dalton 31036  
Elin 30770  
Akura 30898, 31051, 31140, 31233,  
31367  
Dansai 30770, 30783, 31115  
Dantax 30539, 30790, 30713, 30723  
Daytek 30872, 31005  
Ellion 30850, 31421  
Elta 30770, 30672, 30690, 30784,  
30788, 30850, 31051, 31115, 31151,  
31233  
Alba 30539, 30695, 30730, 30672,  
30713, 30783, 31140, 31530  
Alize 31151  
Bush 30730, 30831, 30672, 30690,  
30713, 30723, 30733, 30778,  
Dayton 30872, 31158  
31051, 31128, 31140, 31351, 31367, DCE 30831  
Eltax 31233, 31321  
Emerson 30591  
Altacom 31224  
31483, 31530  
Decca 30770, 31115  
Amitech 30770, 30784, 30850  
Amoi 30852  
Denon 30490, 30634, 31634, 32258  
Denver 30672, 30778, 30788, 30898,  
31056, 31107, 31321, 31338  
Denzel 30665  
Enterprise 30591  
Enzer 31228  
Cambridge Audio 30751  
Campomatic Digital 31051  
Cat 30789, 31421  
Amstrad 30770, 30790, 30713,  
31151, 31367  
EuroLine 30675, 30788, 31115,  
31233, 31351  
CCE 30730  
Amuseer 31351  
AMW 30872  
Desay 30843  
Centrum 30675, 30713, 30779,  
30789, 31005, 31227  
CGV 30733, 30751, 31115  
Cinea 30841  
Fenner 30651  
Dgtec 30672  
Ferguson 30695, 30651, 30713,  
30898  
Ansonic 30831, 30759, 31351  
Apex Digital 30672, 30794, 31004  
Arena 31115  
Diamond 30651  
Digihome 30713  
Finlux 30741, 30591, 30770, 30672,  
30751, 30783  
DigiLogic 30713  
Cinetec 30713, 30872  
Classic 30730  
Aristona 30539, 30646  
Asono 31224  
Digitor 30690  
Fintec 31530  
Digitrex 31056  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Firstline 30713, 30843, 30869, 31530 Luxman 30573  
Prosonic 30752  
Tangent 31321  
Fisher 30670  
Luxor 30713, 31004  
ProVision 30730, 31107, 31321  
Pye 30539, 30646  
Targa 30741, 31227  
Tatung 30770  
Funai 30695, 30675  
Magnavox 30539, 30503, 30646,  
30675, 30713, 30821, 31140  
Magnex 30723  
Tchibo 30741  
Gateway 31158  
QONIX 30790, 31051  
TCM 30741, 30790  
Teac 30741, 30768, 30759, 31227  
Tec 30898  
Germatic 31051  
Radionette 30741, 30869  
Radiotone 30713  
Raite 30665  
Global Link 31224  
Majestic 31107  
Global Solutions 30768  
Global Sphere 31152  
Go Video 30783, 30869  
GoldStar 30741, 30591  
Goodmans 30730, 30651, 30790,  
Manhattan 30713  
Marantz 30539  
Technica 31367  
RCA 30522  
REC 30490  
Technics 30490, 30703  
Technika 30770, 30831, 31115,  
31530  
Mark 30713  
Marquant 30770  
Mastec 31338  
Redstar 30770, 30759, 30763, 30788,  
30898, 31107  
Technisson 31115  
Technosonic 31051, 31115, 31367  
Techwood 30713, 31530  
Tedelex 31228  
30690, 30713, 30723, 30783, 31004, Matsui 30695, 30651, 30672, 30713,  
Relisys 31347  
31140, 31152, 31423, 31530  
GPX 30741  
31004  
Reoc 30768, 30752  
Revoy 30841  
Maxim 30713, 30872, 31367  
MBO 30730, 30690  
MDS 30713, 30778  
Mecotek 30770  
Graetz 30665  
Richmond 31233  
Telefunken 30551  
Teletech 30768, 30713  
Tensai 30770, 30651, 30690  
Tevion 30651, 30898, 31036, 31227,  
31483  
Gran Prix 30831, 30898  
Grandin 30713, 31233  
Roadstar 30730, 30672, 30690,  
30713, 30898, 31051, 31227  
Ronin 30710, 30872  
Rotel 30623, 30558, 31178  
Rownsonic 30789  
Grundig 30539, 30551, 30695, 30651, Mediencom 30751  
30790, 30670, 30713, 30775, 31004, Medion 30741, 30630, 30831, 30651,  
31036, 31128  
30783, 31107, 31270, 31347, 31423  
MEI 30790  
Memorex 30831  
Metronic 30690  
Theta Digital 30571  
Thomson 30551, 30522  
Tokai 30790, 30665, 30784, 30788,  
30898, 31233  
Grunkel 30770, 30831, 30790  
GVG 30770  
Saba 30551, 30651  
Saivod 30831, 30759, 31367  
Salora 30741  
H & B 30713, 30841, 30850, 31233,  
31421  
Metz 30571, 30525, 30713  
MiCO 30723, 30751, 31223  
Micromaxx 30695  
Micromedia 30539, 30503  
Micromega 30539, 31005  
Microsoft 30522, 32083  
Microstar 30831  
Tom-Tec 30789  
Sampo 31321  
Hanseatic 30741, 30790, 30783  
Harman/Kardon 30582, 30702  
HCM 30788  
Top Suxess 31224  
Toshiba 30503, 30695, 31045, 31510,  
31515, 31608, 31639, 31769  
Tosumi 31367  
Samsung 30490, 30573, 30199,  
30744, 30899, 31044, 31075, 31635,  
31748, 32107, 32269  
Sansui 30695, 30751, 31228  
Sanyo 30670, 30713, 31228  
Scan 30850  
HE 30730  
Henss 30713  
TProgress 30752  
HiMAX 30843  
TRANS-continents 30831, 30826,  
30872, 31233, 31321  
Tredex 30843  
Minato 30752  
Hitachi 30573, 30664, 30141, 30665,  
30713, 31664, 31764  
Hiteker 30672  
ScanMagic 30730  
Minax 30713  
Schaub Lorenz 30770, 30788, 31115,  
31151  
Minoka 30770, 31115  
Mirror 30752  
Trevi 30831  
Hoeher 30831, 30651, 30713, 30826,  
31004, 31224, 31530  
Home Electronics 30770, 30730  
Home Tech Industries 31107, 31224  
HotMedia 31152  
TSM 31224  
Schmartz 32367  
Mitsubishi 30521, 30713, 31403  
Mizuda 30770  
TVE 30713  
Schneider 30539, 30831, 30646,  
30651, 30790, 30713, 30779, 30783,  
30788, 30869, 31227, 31367  
Schoentech 30713  
Monyka 30665  
Umax 30690, 31151  
MPX 30843  
United 30695, 30730, 30675, 30713,  
30788, 30826, 31115, 31152, 31228,  
31233, 31351, 31367  
Mustek 30730  
Humax 30646  
Schwaiger 30752  
Mx Onda 30651, 30751, 31223  
Mystral 30831  
HYD 31233  
Scientific Labs 30768  
Scott 30651, 30672, 31005, 31036,  
31233, 31423  
Universum 30741, 30591, 30790,  
30713, 30779, 30869, 31227, 31530  
Uptek 30763  
Hyundai 30850  
NAD 30741  
Iekei 31107  
Naiko 30770, 31004, 31367  
Nakamichi 31222  
Narita 31367  
Ingelen 30788  
Ingersol 31023  
Initial 31472  
Seeltech 31224, 31338  
SEG 30665, 30713, 30763, 30872,  
31483, 31530  
Venturer 30790, 31769  
Vestel 30713, 31530  
Voxson 30730, 30831  
Vtrek 31228  
NEC 30785  
Inno Hit 30713  
Irradio 30869, 31115, 31224, 31233  
IRT 30783  
Shanghai 30672  
Neufunk 30665  
Nevir 30770, 30831, 30672  
Nexius 30790  
Sharp 30630, 30675, 30713, 30752,  
30869, 31256, 32250  
Sherwood 30741  
Waitec 30730, 31151, 31224, 31233  
Waltham 30713, 31530  
Welkin 30831  
ISP 30695  
NFREN 30826  
Sigmatek 31005, 31224  
Siltex 31224  
Silva 30788, 30898  
Jamo 31036  
Nintaus 31051  
Wellington 30713  
Jaton 30665  
Nordmende 30831  
Noriko 30752  
Weltstar 30713  
JDB 30730  
Silva Schneider 30741, 30831,  
30869, 30898, 31367  
SilverCrest 31152  
Wharfedale 30790, 30713, 30751,  
30752, 31115  
JDV 31367  
Okano 30752  
Olidata 30672  
JGC 31530  
Wilson 30831, 31233  
Windsor 30713  
JMB 30695  
Onkyo 30503, 30612, 30627, 31612,  
31769, 32147  
Sistemas 30672  
JVC 30623, 30539, 30503, 30558,  
30867, 31164, 31275, 31550  
jWin 31051  
Skantic 30539, 30713  
Skymaster 30730, 30768  
Skyworth 30898  
Windy Sam 30573  
Oopla 31158  
Woxter 31005, 31151, 31224, 31338  
Oppo 30575  
Xbox 30522, 32083  
Xenius 30790  
Kansai 31107  
Optim 30843  
Sliding 31115  
Kansas Technologies 31233, 31530  
Karcher 30783, 31367  
Kendo 30831, 30672, 30713, 31483  
Kennex 30770, 30713, 30898  
Kenwood 30490, 30534  
Kiiro 30770  
Optimus 30525  
Orbit 30872  
SM Electronic 30730, 30768, 30690,  
31152  
Yakumo 31004, 31056  
Yamada 30872, 31004, 31056, 31151,  
31158, 31416  
Orion 30695, 30713, 31128, 31233  
Oritron 30651  
Smart 30713  
Sonic Blue 30783  
Yamaha 30490, 30539, 30646, 30497,  
30545, 30817  
Ormond 30713  
Sony 30533, 30864, 31033, 31069,  
31070, 31431, 31516, 31533, 31536  
Sound Color 31233  
Soundmaster 30768  
Soundwave 30713, 30783, 31530  
Standard 30831, 30768, 30651,  
30788, 30898  
Pacific 30831, 30768, 30790, 30713,  
30759  
Kiss 30665, 30841  
Yamakawa 30665, 30710, 30872  
Yukai 30730  
KLH 31149  
Packard Bell 30831, 31321  
Palladium 30695, 30713, 30779  
Panasonic 30490, 30632, 30703,  
31010, 31011, 31579, 31641  
Panda 30789, 31107  
Paramount Pictures 30779  
peeKTon 30898, 31224  
Philco 30690, 30733  
Kreisen 31421  
Zenith 30503, 30591  
KXD 31107, 31321  
Lawson 30768  
Leiker 30872  
Blu-ray  
Star Clusters 31152, 31227  
Starlogic 31005  
Pioneer 30142, 32442  
Lenco 30770, 30651, 30713, 30778  
Lenoir 31228  
Starmedia 31005, 31224  
Strato 31152  
Denon 32258  
LG 30741  
Lexia 30768  
Strong 30713  
LG 30741, 30591, 30790, 30869  
Lifetec 30831, 30651, 31347  
Limit 30768  
Philips 30539, 30503, 30646, 30675,  
30854, 31158, 31267, 31340, 31354,  
31506, 32056, 32084  
Sunkai 30770, 30850  
Sunstech 30831  
Onkyo 32147  
Panasonic 31641  
Philips 32084  
Sunwood 30788, 30898  
Supervision 30768, 31152  
SVA 30672, 30752  
LiteOn 31058, 31158, 31416  
Lodos 30713  
Plu2 30850  
Powerpoint 30872, 31005  
Prinz 30831  
Samsung 30199  
Sharp 32250  
Sony 31516  
Loewe 30539, 30741, 30511  
Logik 30713  
Sylvania 30675, 32194  
Symphonic 30675  
Prism 30831  
Logix 30783  
Luker 31367  
ProCaster 31004  
Synn 30768  
Proline 30651, 30672, 30710, 31004,  
31483  
Syscom 30826  
HD-DVD  
Lumatron 30741, 30695, 30713,  
31115, 31321  
LG 30741  
Proscan 30522  
TAG McLaren 30894  
Tandberg 30713  
Lunatron 30741  
Proson 30713  
Microsoft 32083  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Onkyo 31769  
Toshiba 31769  
Xbox 32083  
Kansas Technologies 31530  
Yakumo 31056  
Bush 31483  
Kreisen 31421  
Yamada 31056, 31158, 31416  
Yamaha 30646  
Centrum 30675  
Clatronic 30675  
KXD 31321  
LG 30741  
Daewoo 31483  
Durabrand 30675  
DVD/PVR Combination  
Lifetec 31347  
LiteOn 31158, 31416  
Loewe 30741  
Lumatron 31321  
DVD-R  
Pioneer 30631  
Pioneer 30631, 31460  
EuroLine 30675  
Airis 31321  
4Kus 31158  
Firstline 30869  
Funai 30695, 30675  
Blu:sens 31321  
GPX 30741  
Mastec 31338  
Medion 30741, 31347  
MiCO 30751  
Airis 31321, 31338  
Alba 31530  
Aristona 30646  
Go Video 30869  
GoldStar 30741  
Hitachi 30141  
Oopla 31158  
BBK 31338  
Belson 31086  
Bush 31530  
JGC 31530  
JVC 30623  
Hitachi 30664, 30141  
Irradio 30869  
Packard Bell 31321  
Panasonic 30490, 31010, 31011,  
31579  
LG 30741  
LiteOn 31416  
JVC 30867, 31164, 31550  
Kendo 31483  
Cat 31421  
Philips 30646, 31158, 31506  
ProVision 31321  
Centrum 31227  
Commax 31321, 31338  
CyberHome 31502  
Cytron 31347  
Medion 30741  
Mitsubishi 31403  
LG 30741, 30869  
Lumatron 30741, 30695  
Lunatron 30741  
Pye 30646  
Panasonic 30490, 31010, 31011,  
31579  
Philips 30539, 31158, 31340  
Relisys 31347  
Roadstar 31227  
Dayton 31158  
Magnavox 30675  
Micromaxx 30695  
Denver 31056, 31338  
Digitrex 31056  
Samsung 31635, 31748, 32107  
Schneider 30646, 31227  
Seeltech 31338  
Samsung 30490, 31635, 32107  
SEG 31530  
Dual 31530  
Orion 30695  
Sharp 31256  
Durabrand 31502, 31530  
SEG 31530  
Panasonic 30490, 31579  
Philips 30539, 30646, 30675, 31267  
Proline 31483  
Silva Schneider 30741  
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070, 31536  
Soundwave 31530  
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070  
Soundwave 31530  
Star Clusters 31227  
Sylvania 30675  
E:max 31321  
Electrohome 32116  
Ellion 31421  
Radionette 30869  
Targa 30741  
Eltax 31321  
Tchibo 30741  
Samsung 30744, 31075, 32269  
Sanyo 30670  
Tangent 31321  
Targa 30741, 31227  
Teac 31227  
Fintec 31530  
Firstline 31530  
Funai 30675  
TCM 30741  
Technika 31530  
Thomson 30551  
Toshiba 31510, 31639  
Schneider 30869  
SEG 31483  
Technika 31530  
Techwood 31530  
Tevion 31227  
Gateway 31158  
Goodmans 31530  
GPX 30741  
Sharp 30630, 30869  
Silva Schneider 30869  
Sony 30864  
Universum 30741  
Thomson 30551  
Toshiba 31510  
Yamada 31416  
Symphonic 30675  
H & B 31421  
Hitachi 30141  
Hoeher 31530  
Humax 30646  
Tevion 31483  
Universum 31227, 31530  
DVD/VCR Combination  
Thomson 30551  
Vestel 31530  
Pioneer 31460  
Toshiba 30503, 31045, 31510  
Waltham 31530  
Woxter 31338  
AEG 30675  
JGC 31530  
JVC 31164, 31275  
United 30675  
Universum 30869  
Broksonic 30695  
CD  
Genexxa 70000, 70032, 70037  
Goldmund 70157  
Onkyo 70101, 70102, 70138, 70381,  
Tandy 70032  
General  
70868, 71322, 71323, 71327  
Technics 70029  
Pioneer 70032, 70468, 70101, 71063,  
Grundig 70157  
Optimus 70000, 70032, 70468, 71063 Thomson 70053  
71087, 73468  
Thorens 70157  
Panasonic 70029, 70388, 70752  
Thule Audio 70157  
Harman/Kardon 70157  
Inkel 70157, 70180  
JVC 70072  
Advantage 70032  
AH! 70157  
Philips 70157, 70626  
Traxdata 70626  
Primare 70157  
Aiwa 70157  
Proton 70157  
Universum 70157, 70053  
Arcam 70157  
Kenwood 70157, 70028, 70626,  
QED 70157  
Quad 70157  
Quasar 70029  
Victor 70072  
Atoll Electronique 70157  
Audio Research 70157  
Audiolab 70157  
Audiomeca 70157  
Audioton 70157  
AVI 70157  
70037  
Wards 70000, 70157, 70032, 70053,  
70087  
Krell 70157  
Linn 70157  
Loewe 70157  
Radiola 70157  
RCA 70053  
Realistic 70180  
Restek 70157  
Revox 70157  
Rotel 70157  
Yamaha 70036, 71292  
Magnavox 70157  
Marantz 70157, 70029, 70626, 70180  
Matsui 70157  
CD-R  
Balanced Audio  
Technology 70157  
Bush 70388  
Pioneer 71087  
Kenwood 70626  
Onkyo 71322, 71323  
Philips 70626  
MCS 70029  
Memorex 70000, 70032, 70468,  
70180  
SAE 70157  
Cairn 70157  
Saisho 70000  
California Audio Labs 70029  
Cambridge 70157  
Meridian 70157  
Sansui 70157  
Micromega 70157  
Miro 70000  
Sanyo 70087  
Cambridge Audio 70157  
Cambridge Soundworks 70157  
Carver 70157  
Sony 70100  
Sharp 70037, 70180  
Sherwood 70180  
Siemens 70157  
Simaudio 70157  
Sony 70000, 70100, 71364  
Sylvania 70157  
Symphonic 70180  
Thomson 70053  
Mission 70157  
Modulaire 70000, 70032, 70468,  
70087, 70180  
Cyrus 70157  
MD  
Denon 70626, 70034, 70766  
DKK 70000  
DMX Electronics 70157  
Dynaco 70157  
Myryad 70157  
Pioneer 71063  
NAD 70000  
Naim 70157  
Onkyo 70868  
Sony 70000  
TAG McLaren 70157  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Acoustic Solutions 01284  
Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412  
Amstrad 00847, 01175, 01113  
Ansonic 02418  
Arnion 01300  
General  
ADB 00642, 02367  
Akai 00200  
Alba 01284  
Asat 00200  
Pioneer 00853, 00329, 01308  
ASCI 01334  
AssCom 00853  
Astro 00173, 01100, 01113  
@sat 01300  
Apro 01672  
@Sky 01334  
Allsat 00200  
Armstrong 00200  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Atlanta 02418  
Atsat 01300  
Hirschmann 00173, 01232, 01412  
Rebox 01214  
Regal 01251  
Vestel 01251, 01284  
Victor 00492  
Hitachi 00819, 01284  
AtSky 01334  
Hornet 01300  
HTS 00775  
Hughes Network Systems 00749  
Humax 01176, 01427, 01781, 01808,  
01882, 01915, 02144, 02357, 02408  
RFT 00200  
Viola Digital 01672  
Vision 01626  
Audioline 01672  
Austar 00879, 00642  
Axil 01457, 02418  
Axitronic 01626  
Roadstar 00853  
Rownsonic 01567  
Visiosat 00560, 01457, 01807  
SAB 01251, 01300  
Saba 00820  
Wharfedale 01284  
Wisi 00173, 01232  
Worldsat 01214, 01251  
Woxter 02418  
B@ytronic 01412  
Balmet 01457  
i-CAN 02367  
Sagem 00820, 01114, 02107  
Saivod 02418  
ID Digital 01176  
Imperial 01195, 01334, 01672  
Inno Hit 01626  
Belson 02418  
Samsung 00853, 01206, 01458,  
01570  
Xoro 01807  
Xsat 00847, 01214, 01323  
Xtreme 01300  
Big Sat 01457  
Black Diamond 01284  
Blaupunkt 00173  
Boca 01232  
Interstar 01214  
ITT Nokia 00723  
Sanyo 01626  
Sat Control 01300  
SAT+ 01409  
Yes 00887  
Jaeger 01334  
JVC 00492, 00775  
Boston 01251  
Satelco 01232  
Zehnder 01232, 01251, 01334, 01412  
Zeta Technology 00200  
Brainwave 01672  
British Sky Broadcasting 00847,  
01175  
Satplus 01100  
Kaon 01300  
Schaub Lorenz 01214  
Schneider 01206, 01251  
Schwaiger 01334, 01412, 01457,  
01672  
Kathrein 00173, 00200, 01416, 01567  
Kenwood 00853  
SAT/PVR Combination  
BskyB 00847, 01175  
Bush 00560, 01284, 01291, 01645,  
01672, 01974  
@sat 01300  
Kreiling 01626  
Kreiselmeyer 00173  
Sedea Electronique 01206, 01626  
SEG 01251, 01626  
Serd 01412  
Allvision 01412  
Amstrad 01175  
Atsat 01300  
L&S Electronic 01334  
LaSAT 00173  
Leiko 01626  
Lemon 01334  
Listo 01626  
Lodos 01284  
Logik 01284  
Canal Digital 00853  
Canal Satellite 00853, 02107  
Canal+ 00853, 02107  
CGV 01567  
Chaparral 00216  
Chess 01334, 01626  
CityCom 01176, 01232, 01781  
Classic 01672  
Comag 01232, 01412  
Coship 01457, 01672  
Crown 01284  
Cyfra+ 01076  
Cyrus 00200  
Servimat 01611  
B@ytronic 01412  
ServiSat 01251  
British Sky Broadcasting 01175  
BskyB 01175  
Siemens 00173, 01334  
Sigmatek 02418  
Bush 00560, 01645  
SKY 00847, 00887, 01175, 00099,  
01848  
Comag 01412  
Magnavox 00722  
SKY Italia 00853, 01848  
Sky XL 01251, 01412  
Sky+ 01175  
Daewoo 01974  
Manhattan 01300  
Marantz 00200  
Digifusion 01645  
DigiQuest 01300  
Maspro 00173  
Skymaster 01334, 01409, 01567,  
01611  
Digiturk 01076  
Matsui 00173, 01284, 01626  
Maximum 01334  
Dish Network System 00775  
Dream Multimedia 01237  
Skymax 00200  
Mediabox 00853  
D-box 00723, 01114  
Daewoo 01974  
Skyplus 01175, 01232, 01334, 01412  
Skyvision 01334  
eMTech 01214  
Mediacom 01206  
MediaSat 00853, 02107  
Medion 01232, 01334, 01412, 01626  
Mega 00200  
Dantax 01626  
SL 01672  
GbSAT 01214  
Gecco 01412  
Denver 02418  
SM Electronic 01409  
Smart 01113, 01232  
Sony 00847, 00853, 00639, 01558  
Star Sat 01214  
Digiality 01334  
Globo 01412  
Metronic 01334  
Metz 00173  
Digifusion 01645  
Digihome 01284  
DigiLogic 01284  
DigiQuest 01300, 01457  
DigiSat 01232  
Goodmans 00560  
Hirschmann 01412  
Humax 01176, 01427, 01808, 02144,  
02357  
Maximum 01334  
Mediacom 01206  
MediaSat 02107  
Medion 01412  
Morgan's 01412  
MySky 01848  
NEOTION 01334  
Nichimen 00560  
Opentel 01412  
Orbis 01412  
Morgan's 00200, 01232, 01412  
Multibroadcast 00879, 00642  
Multichoice 00879, 00642, 01433,  
01959, 01960  
Starlite 00200  
Stream 01848  
Stream System 01300  
Strong 00853, 00820, 00879, 01284,  
01409, 01626, 02418  
Sumin 01412  
Digisky 01457  
Myryad 00200  
MySky 01848  
Digiturk 01076  
DirecTV 00099  
Dish Network System 00775  
DNT 00200  
Sunny 01300  
NEOTION 01334  
Sunstar 00642  
Netsat 00887, 00099  
Neuling 01232  
Dream Multimedia 01237  
DSTV 01433  
Supernova 00887  
Systec 01334  
Nichimen 00560  
Durabrand 01284  
Nikko 00723, 00200  
Nokia 00853, 00723, 01223  
Targa 01807  
TBoston 01251, 02418  
Technical 01626  
Echostar 00853, 00775, 01323, 01409  
Elap 01567  
OctalTV 01505  
Onn 01284  
Elbe 02418  
TechniSat 01100, 01195  
Technosonic 00560, 01672  
Technotrend 01672  
Techwood 01284, 01626  
TELE System 01251, 01409, 01611  
Telestar 01100, 01195, 01251, 01334,  
01626, 01672  
Pace 01175, 01423  
Panasonic 01304  
Philips 00099  
Elta 00200  
Opentel 01232, 01412  
Optex 01611, 01626  
Optus 00879  
eMTech 01214  
Engel 01251  
Pixx 01807  
EuroLine 01251  
Expressvu 00775  
Orbis 01232, 01334, 01412  
Orbitech 01100, 01195  
Proscan 00392  
Rebox 01214  
Ferguson 01291  
Finlux 01626  
P/Sat 01232  
Televes 01214, 01300, 01334  
Televisa 00887  
Telewire 01232  
Samsung 01206, 01570  
Sat Control 01300  
Schneider 01206  
Schwaiger 01412  
Sedea Electronique 01206  
Serd 01412  
SKY 01175, 01848  
SKY Italia 01848  
Sky XL 01412  
Skyplus 01175, 01334, 01412  
Stream System 01300  
Sumin 01412  
Sunny 01300  
Targa 01807  
TechniSat 01195  
Technosonic 00560  
Telestar 01195  
Thomson 01175  
Topfield 01206  
Visiosat 00560, 01807  
Xoro 01807  
Xtreme 01300  
Pace 00847, 00853, 00200, 00887,  
01175, 00329, 01323, 01423, 01848  
Pacific 01284  
Fly Com 01457  
FMD 01457  
Tevion 00560, 01409, 01672  
Thomson 00847, 00853, 00820,  
01175, 00392, 01046, 01291, 02107,  
02176  
Fortec Star 01821  
Foxtel 00879  
Palcom 01409  
Panasat 00879, 01433  
Panasonic 00847, 00701, 01304  
Panda 00173  
Fuba 00173, 01214, 01251  
Galaxis 00853  
Tiny 01672  
Pansat 01807  
Pass 01567  
GbSAT 01214  
Tokai 00200  
Gecco 01412  
Tonna 01611  
peeKTon 01457, 02418  
Philips 00853, 00173, 00200, 01114,  
00099, 00722, 01076, 01672, 02107,  
02176  
General Satellite 01176  
Globo 01251, 01334, 01412, 01626  
GOD Digital 00200  
Gold Box 00853  
Topfield 01206, 01208  
Toshiba 00749, 00790, 01284  
TPS 00820  
Trevi 01251  
Phoenix 02418  
Goodmans 00560, 01284, 01291,  
02337  
Triax 00853, 00200, 01113, 01251,  
01291, 01611, 01626  
Twinner 01611  
Pino 01334  
Pixx 01807  
Gradiente 00887  
PMB 01611  
Grandin 01626  
UEC 00879  
Preisner 01113  
Grocos 01457  
Uniden 00722  
Unisat 00200  
Premier 00723, 02176  
Proline 01284  
Grundig 00847, 00853, 00173, 00879,  
01284, 01291, 01672  
United 01251  
Proscan 00392  
Hama 01567  
Universum 00173, 01251  
Radiola 00200  
Hanseatic 01100  
Hauppauge 01672  
HB 01214  
Variosat 00173  
VEA 02418  
Ventana 00200  
Radix 01113  
Zehnder 01412  
RCA 00143, 00392, 00566  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Cable Set Top Box  
12  
Humax 00660, 01813, 01885, 01981,  
Philips 00817, 01582, 01619, 01958,  
02174  
US Electronics 00276  
General  
01983, 02142, 02447  
i-CAN 01585  
Virgin Media 01068, 01060, 01987  
Visiopass 00817  
Pioneer 00144, 00533, 00877, 01782  
Premier 02174  
ABC 00008, 00237  
ADB 01585  
Austar 00276  
Pulsar 00000  
Jerrold 00276, 00476, 00810  
Zenith 00000, 00525  
Runco 00000  
Kabel Deutschland 01958, 01981,  
01983  
Sagem 00817  
Salora 00000  
Cable/PVR Combination  
Birmingham Cable  
Communications 00276  
Freebox 01482, 01976  
Macab 00817  
Samsung 01060, 00000, 00144,  
01666, 02015, 02174  
Satbox 00375  
Humax 01813, 01885, 01981, 01983,  
02142  
Matav 01082  
Cable & Wireless 01068  
Daeryung 00008  
Encon 00008  
Memorex 00000  
Motorola 00276  
Scientific Atlanta 00008, 00237,  
00877, 01987  
Philips 01619  
Noos 00817  
Nova Vision 00008  
NTL 01068, 01060, 00276  
Scientific Atlanta 01987  
StarHub 01927  
StarHub 00276, 01927  
Supercable 00276  
Fosgate 00276  
France Telecom 00817  
Freebox 01482, 01976  
Telenet 01920  
Telewest 01987  
Telefonica 01585  
Telenet 01920  
Telewest 01068, 01987  
Thomson 01256, 01582, 01958,  
01981, 01983, 02174  
Toshiba 00000  
Ono 01068  
Optus 00276  
Orange 00817  
Galaxi 00008  
GE 00237  
General Instrument 00276, 00476  
GoldStar 00144  
UPC 01582  
Virgin Media 01987  
Pace 01068, 01060, 00237, 01577  
Panama 00107  
Panasonic 00000, 00107, 00144  
Paragon 00000  
UPC 01582  
Laser Disc Player  
Pioneer 30241, 32447  
Denon 30241  
Magnavox 30241  
Cassette Deck  
Pioneer 40027, 42446  
Inkel 40070  
Optimus 40027  
Victor 40244  
Aiwa 40029  
JVC 40244  
Philips 40029  
Wards 40029, 40027  
Yamaha 40097  
Arcam 40076  
Audiolab 40029  
Kenwood 40070  
Radiola 40029  
Revox 40029  
Magnavox 40029  
Marantz 40029  
Myryad 40029  
Carver 40029  
Denon 40076  
Grundig 40029  
Sansui 40029  
Sony 40243  
Onkyo 40135  
Thorens 40029  
Digital Tape  
Pioneer 40019  
Onkyo 40019  
Tascam 40019  
Tescam 40019  
Video Accessory  
Pioneer 01010  
Acer 01272  
ADB 02586  
Amino 01481  
Daily Media 01272  
Dgtec 01363  
Fujitsu Siemens 01272  
Hewlett Packard 01272  
Kreatel 01385  
Microsoft 01272, 02049  
Packard Bell 01272  
Philips 01272  
Ricavision 01272  
Sharp 01010  
Sylvania 01563  
VIA Technologies 01272  
Xbox 02049  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
12  
Miscellaneous  
Power requirements . . . . . . . AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 W  
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 W (KURO LINK OFF)  
0.8 W (KURO LINK ON)  
• These specifications are applicable when the power  
supply is 230 V.  
Dimensions . . . . . .420 (W) mm x 173 (H) mm x 433 (D) mm  
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 kg  
Audio section  
Rated power output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 1 %)  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W  
Rated power output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 0.09 %)  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W  
Total Harmonic Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.06 %  
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 100 W + 100 W)  
Furnished Parts Number  
MCACC Setup microphone (APM7009). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Remote control unit (AXD7547) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AA/IEC R6 dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
iPod cable (ADE7129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
These operating instructions  
Guaranteed speaker impedance  
Note  
. . . . . . . .16 Ω to 8 Ω, less than 8 Ω to 6 Ω (setting required)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB  
(Pure Direct Mode)  
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 mV/47 kΩ  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Cleaning the unit  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and  
dirt.  
Tuner Section  
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth  
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six  
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe  
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or  
cleansers.  
Frequency Range (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Antenna Input (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced  
Frequency Range (AM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz  
Antenna (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna (balanced)  
Video Section  
Signal level  
Composite/S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω),  
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or  
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will  
corrode the surface.  
Corresponding maximum resolution  
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1080p (1125p)  
(Video convert off)  
Our philosophy  
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater  
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of  
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they  
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing  
on three important steps:  
Digital In/Out Section  
HDMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (Not DVI)  
HDMI output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA  
USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)  
iPod terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB, and Video (Composite)  
1
Designing with carefully selected components so  
as to transmit the original soundtrack accurately  
Integrated control section  
Control (SR) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
Control (IR) terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
IR signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)  
12 V Trigger terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
12 V Trigger output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 V, Total 50 mA  
RS-232C cable type. . . . . . . 9-pin, cross type, female-female  
2
Allowing for customized acoustic calibration  
according to any listening area  
3
Tuning that transmits soul  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced by NEC corporation.  
FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Index  
Numerics  
12V trigger 34  
E
Effect 61  
A
F
Acoustic Cal EQ 81  
Fine Channel Level 75  
Fine Speaker Distance 75  
Flicker Reduction 90  
Front Stage Surround Advance 52  
Acoustic Calibration EQ 60  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust 77  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional 77  
Advanced MCACC 71-83  
Output PC 34, 81  
Advanced surround 51  
Analog attenuator 64  
Aspect 62  
Audio cable 21  
AUDIO PARAMETER 60  
Auto delay 61  
Auto level control (ALC) 50, 104  
Auto MCACC 39, 72  
Auto surround 50, 104  
H
HDCP 26  
HDMI 23-26, 35, 42, 57-59, 65, 97  
HDMI Audio 61  
Hue 62  
I
Input function 42  
Default and possible settings 41  
Input Setup 40-41  
Input signal 55  
B
iPod 36, 43-44, 101  
Switching controls 44  
IR jack 33  
Bass 60  
Bi-amp 16, 20, 21, 85  
Bi-wiring 20  
Brightness 62  
K
KURO LINK 26, 57-59  
C
Center Image 61  
Center Width 61  
Channel Level 80, 86  
Chroma Level 62  
Contrast 62  
L
LFE Attenuate 60  
Loudness 60  
M
CONTROL jack 33  
Manual MCACC 74  
Manual speaker setup 84  
MCACC Data 80  
MCACC preset 54, 60, 82  
Midnight 60  
Multi Zone 16, 19, 21, 31-32, 63, 85, 89  
Multichannel analog input 28, 43, 89  
D
Data Management 82  
DeepColor 26  
Default system settings 66  
Demo 71  
Detail 62  
Dialog Enhancement 60  
Digital Noise Reduction 60  
Digital Video Conversion 62  
Dimension 61  
N
Neural THX 48, 103  
Display 12, 65, 96  
Dolby 50, 100  
DTS 50, 101  
O
OSD Language (GUI) 38  
Dual Mono 60  
Dynamic Range Control 60  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
P
U
Panorama 61  
Phase control 55  
Placing 17  
Up Mix 53  
USB 36, 45-47, 99  
Playable file formats 47  
Play 42  
Power cord 37  
Power ON Level 90  
PQLS 59  
V
Video cable 22  
Video converter 22  
VIDEO PARAMETER 62  
Volume Limit 90  
Pre-out 29  
Preset code 105  
Progressive Motion 62  
Pure direct 53  
PureCinema 62  
W
WMA9 101  
WMA9 Pro 29  
R
RDS 49  
X
Recording 64  
Remote control 8, 9, 67-70, 90, 97, 105  
Reset 66  
x.v.Color 26  
X-Curve 87  
Resolution 62  
Y
YNR 62  
S
SACD Gain 61  
Setup microphone 39, 73  
Sharpness 62  
Sleep timer 65  
Sound Delay 60  
Sound Retriever 60  
Speaker 16-21, 91  
Speaker B 16, 19, 21, 63, 85  
Speaker Distance 80, 87  
Speaker impedance 38  
Speaker Setting 80, 85  
Standard surround 50  
Standing Wave 60, 76  
Status 65  
Stream direct 53, 104  
Streo 52  
Surround back channel processing 53  
Surround back speaker 85  
Synchronized amp mode 59  
System Setup 84  
T
THX 17, 72, 87, 102  
Home THX 51  
Tone Control 60  
Treble 60  
Troubleshooting 92  
Tuner 30, 48-49  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D. F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_B_En  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2009 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<ARB7428-A>  
Printed in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Peripheral Electronics Car Stereo System Aux2Car User Manual
Philips CD Player AZ1830 User Manual
Philips Freezer 37 42PF9731D 10 User Manual
Philips Headphones AQ6340 00 User Manual
Philips Insect Control Equipment MK100 Series User Manual
Philips Switch SWS3434W User Manual
Pinnacle Design TV Video Accessories TV24203 User Manual
Pioneer Blu ray Player BDP LX71 User Manual
Poulan Snow Blower 414659 User Manual
PVI Industries Water Heater PV500 47C User Manual